JP6471370B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  In conventional game machines, various effects are performed in order to improve the interest of the player.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the production means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine characterized by a production means.

The above purpose is
A game stand with directing means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a second production,
The first effect is an effect that is started after the selection effect when selected by a selection effect that selects one effect candidate from a plurality of effect candidates,
The second effect is an effect not included in the plurality of effect candidates,
The second effect is an effect related to promotion,
The second production is a production with a success pattern and a failure pattern,
During the execution of the first jackpot game, the second performance by the failure pattern is performed,
The first performance is not performed during the execution of the first jackpot game,
In some cases, the first performance is performed without performing the second performance during the execution of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “first case”).
In some cases, the first presentation is performed after the second presentation according to the success pattern is performed during the execution of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “second case”).
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is started after the second jackpot game is started is slower than in the first case,
When the first jackpot game is started, a start effect is performed,
An end effect is performed before the first jackpot game ends ,
In the first case, it is suggested that it is the second jackpot game before the start of the jackpot game,
In the second case, it is not suggested to be the second jackpot game before the start of the jackpot game,
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) is a figure which shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the decoration design in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention, after the game per special figure 1 which has been executed with the predetermined special figure 1 special figure (Special Figure J, Special Figure I, Special Figure H) stopped and displayed. It is a table which shows a gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetch process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which illustrates the state by which the prefetch result was memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1, and (b) illustrates a state where the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 (C) exemplifies the state of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special drawing 1 related lottery process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for the success / failure determination used with the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination used with the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table which determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game with the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation display time determination table which determines the fluctuation | variation time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation game with the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is 1st. The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit image control process. ing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is 2nd. The flow of the sub control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart (part 1) illustrating a command process in the first sub control unit of the pachinko machine 100 in more detail, which is Example 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. 7 is a flowchart (part 2) illustrating the command processing in the first sub control unit of the pachinko machine 100 in more detail, which is Example 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating in detail the effect changing process in the first sub-control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating in detail the big hit effect processing in the first sub control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is Example 1 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 1 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the 2R big hit (latency probability change and sudden probability change) and the attack release pattern of a small hit in time series. It is Example 1 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect (the 1) displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 1 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect (the 2) displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 1 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect of 15R jackpot game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 1 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect in 15R jackpot game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 2 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect of 15R jackpot game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 2 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect in 15R jackpot game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 3 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect of 15R big hit game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 3 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect in 15R jackpot game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 4 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect of 15R jackpot game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 4 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect in 15R big hit game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 5 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect of 15R jackpot game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 5 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect in 15R jackpot game displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 6 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 7 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 8 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. It is Example 8 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the 2R big hit (sudden probability change) attacker release pattern in time series. It is Example 8 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect (the 1) displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 8 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect (the 2) displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. It is Example 8 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect (the 3) displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 8 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect (the 4) displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 9 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect (the 1) displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 9 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect (the 2) displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. It is Example 10 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is Example 11 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the effect displayed with the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game stand by the modification of one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game machine by the modification of one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) is a portable provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. A telephone 3000 is shown, (c) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error canceling switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with 168, launch board constituting a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 74, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the normal symbol. A holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a display range in which one small, for example, circular symbol can be displayed, and a fourth symbol display region (not shown in FIG. 3) provided at, for example, the lower left corner of the effect display region 208d. (Shown). In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (wins in the general winning holes 226). In this case, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is a ball that is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “prize ball”), and a ball that is lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). Is included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided directly below the special figure 1 starting port 230. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. While the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a sphere. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure variable game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rod 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball that has been picked up by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball passes to the special opening 1 230 in the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also includes a random value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes 2 counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 212 or the special symbol 2 display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a special figure 1 retention lamp 218, a special figure 2 retention lamp 220, and a high-accuracy medium lamp 222) And the like, and a variety of solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and the like. A driving circuit 334 is connected.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. 100 game information (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power source. When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, and image data stored in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404, and the VRAM 436 are read out. Display images using the work area And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 forms (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time and frequency. It is equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 basically includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the effect movable body 224, a movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 output to the circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 And a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the types of types of special maps and general maps that are stopped and displayed by the special map display device 212, the special map display device 214, and the general map display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows eleven types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure K” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is a difference in the special figure variable game after the big hit game, and the probability of winning the big hit is high (probable big hit) or low (normally big hit). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special big hit game ends and after the 15R big hit game ends, the state shifts to the electric support state (referred to as a short time state together with the variable time reduction state of the special figure variable game). Although the time-short state will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time-short state is referred to as a normal high-probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time-short state is referred to as a normal-low probability state. “Special Figure A” which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special figure high probability, and “Special B” which is a 15R jackpot symbol is a special figure low probability general figure high probability state. (Electric support state or short time state). Note that the timing when the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state are reached is the start of the first special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a jump-up bonus symbol, and after the big hit game, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered in the same manner as the 15R special big hit symbol. The jackpot game with the jump-up bonus will be described later with reference to FIGS. “Special figure D” is a step-up bonus symbol, and after the big hit game, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered in the same manner as the 15R special big hit symbol. The jackpot game with the step-up bonus will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. “Special figure E” is a substantial 4R jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, it becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. The jackpot game with the substantial 4R jackpot will be described later with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. “Special figure F” is a 4R special jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, it becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state in the same manner as the 15R special jackpot symbol. That is, “Special Figure F” is 4R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure G” is a 4R big hit symbol, and after the big hit game, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is entered in the same manner as the 15R big hit symbol. In other words, “Special Figure G” is 4R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure H” is a 2R big hit symbol and is called sudden change. Sudden probability change will be in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game, like the 15R special big hit symbol. The big hit game due to sudden change in probability will be described later with reference to FIG. "Special figure I" is a 2R big hit symbol and is called latent probability variation. The latent probability change becomes a special figure high probability low probability state (latency probability variation state) after the big hit game ends. The big hit game by the latent probability change will be described later with reference to FIG.

  “Special figure J” is a small hit symbol, and after the small hit game, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (may be referred to as a normal state or a normal game state). In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as “Special Figure H” and “Special Figure I” (in this embodiment, twice). However, if a predetermined amount of game value (for example, 10 balls are entered) is acquired by the first attacker release, the second attacker release is not performed. Further, in the case where the attacker is configured to be released 15 times in the small hit game, for example, when the number of entered balls reaches 10 in the first to thirteenth times, the attackers are not released after the 14th time. Further, the “special chart K” is an out-of-order symbol, which does not open the attacker and has a relatively small advantage for the player.

  FIG. 5B shows eight types of special figures from “special figure a” to “special figure h” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 2. In FIG. 5B, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special Figure a” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol. “Special figure a”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure b”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special drawing a” and “special drawing b” are symbols with which the degree of advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  “Special figure c” is a step-up bonus symbol, and after the big hit game, the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered in the same manner as the 15R special big hit symbol. “Special figure d” is substantially a 4R jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is entered. “Special figure e” is a 4R special jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, it becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state in the same manner as the 15R special jackpot symbol. That is, “Special Figure e” is 4R compared to “Special Figure a” which is 15R. “Special figure f” is a 4R jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is entered in the same manner as the 15R jackpot symbol. That is, “Special Figure f” is 4R compared to “Special Figure b” which is 15R.

  “Special figure g” is a sudden probability change of the 2R jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is over, the special figure high probability common figure high probability state is entered in the same manner as the 15R special jackpot symbol. The “special figure h” is a off-line symbol, which does not open the attacker and has a relatively small advantage for the player. In the present embodiment, different symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but it is of course possible to use a symbol that is a common display pattern in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG.5 (c), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which light-extinguishes, and the black-colored part has shown the location of the segment which lights up.

  FIG. 6 shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure a” or the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” and “Special Figure b” is notified, the same decorative design is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Three symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” or “special drawing a” is explicitly notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration” 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ").

  In addition, when the 4R special big hit (probable big hit) of "Special Figure F" and "Special Figure e" or the 4R big hit (Normal Big Hit) of "Special Figure G" and "Special Figure f" is notified, the symbol display area A combination of symbols (for example, “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” or “decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8”) in which three identical ornamental symbols are arranged in 208a to 208c is stopped and displayed. When the 4R special jackpot of “special drawing F” and “special drawing e” is explicitly notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration” 5-decoration 5-decoration 5 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying the step-up bonus (15R probability variation big hit) of "Special figure D" and "Special figure c" or the actual 4R big hit (ordinary big hit) of "Special figure E" and "Special figure d" A combination of symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, “decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9”, etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when notifying the jump-up bonus (15R probability variation big hit) of "Special Figure C", the latent probability change of "Special Figure I", or the small hit of "Special Figure J", decorations are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A symbol combination in which three symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when a sudden change in probability of “special drawing H” or “special drawing g” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5”). "Is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing K” and “special drawing h”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 6 are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined. However, the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot. For example, it may be a 15R probability variation big hit in the case of decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4. Further, in the present embodiment, the sudden probability variation, the latent probability variation, the jump-up bonus, and the small hit symbol are all numbers.

Here, the advantage will be described in detail. Since the advantage varies depending on the item to be compared, it is described separately for each item below. In the following description, the magnitude of the advantage is expressed using an inequality sign, and for example, A> B indicates that A is more advantageous than B. A ≧ B indicates that A has an advantage equal to or higher than B, and A = B indicates that the advantages of A and B are the same.
(1) Advantages regarding the number of game media that can be acquired (number of games):
(A) 15R big hit (probability / normal / jump-up bonus / step-up bonus)> 15R big hit (substantial 4R) = 4R big hit (probability / normal)> 2R big hit (sudden probability / latency probability change)> small hit> out (b ) 15R jackpot (probability / normal / step-up bonus) ≧ 15R jackpot (jump-up bonus)
In the 15R jackpot with the jump-up bonus, which will be described in detail later, the attacker who cannot easily enter the game medium is released twice. For this reason, since the opening time of the attacker in which the game medium is easy to enter becomes shorter than the other 15R big hits, the advantage becomes lower than the other 15R big hits.
(2) Advantages regarding the number of rounds:
15R jackpot (probability / normal / jump-up bonus / step-up bonus / substantial 4R)> 4R jackpot (probability / normal)> 2R jackpot (sudden probability / latency probability change)> small hit> out (3) game after big hit game State (when it is judged that the special figure high probability state is more advantageous):
15R big hit (probability / jump-up bonus / step-up bonus) = 4R big hit (probability change) = 2R big hit (sudden probability change) = 2R big hit (latency probability change)> 15R big hit (normal / substantial 4R) = 4R big hit (normal)> small Win = losing (4) Game state after the big hit game (when it is judged that the usual high probability state is more advantageous):
15R big hit (probability / jump-up bonus / step-up bonus) = 4R big hit (probability change) = 2R big hit (sudden probability change)> 2R big hit (latency probability change)> 15R big hit (normal / substantial 4R) = 4R big hit (normal)> small Hit = detachment (5) Advantage of losing small hit:
(A) Number of times the attacker is released: small hit> out (b) About gaming state: small hit = out Note that, for the performance side, for example, small hit> out. This can be said that the small hit is more advantageous than the loss in that it can be thought that it may be a latent probability change, but it cannot be generally stated because it varies depending on the player's sense.

  FIG. 7 is a table showing the game state after the end of the game per special figure 1 executed with the special symbols per special figure (special figure J, special figure I, special figure H) stopped and displayed. As shown in the table, if the game state (current game state) at the start of special figure 1 variable game is the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (normal state), special figure J (small hit) will stop The game state after the small hit game displayed and executed is the normal state. In addition, when the current game state is the normal state, the game state after the end of the big hit game executed with the special figure I (latency probability change) stopped and displayed becomes the latent probability change state. In addition, when the current game state is the normal state, the game state after the end of the big hit game executed with the special figure H (sudden probability change) stopped and displayed becomes the probability change state.

  Also, if the current gaming state is a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state (latency probability variation state), the gaming state after the end of the small hit game executed with the special figure J (small hit) stopped and displayed is The latent probability change state. In addition, when the current gaming state is the latent probability changing state, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game executed with the special figure I (latent probability changing) stopped and displayed becomes the probability changing state. In addition, when the current gaming state is the latent probability changing state, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game executed with the special figure H (sudden probability changing) stopped and displayed becomes the probability changing state.

  In addition, when the current game state is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state), the game state after the end of the small hit game executed with the special figure J (small hit) being stopped is displayed. It becomes a state. In addition, when the current game state is a probability change state, the game state after the end of the big hit game executed with the special figure I (latency probability change) stopped and displayed becomes the probability change state. In addition, when the current gaming state is the probability variation state, the game state after the end of the big hit game executed with the special figure H (sudden probability variation) stopped and displayed becomes the probability variation state.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the special figure I is won during the latent probability variation, the probability variation state is suddenly entered. That is, when the special figure I of the latent probability change is won in the normal state, the next gaming state (the gaming state after the end of the big hit game) becomes the latent probability varying state. If the special figure I of the latent probability change is won during the latent probability change, the next gaming state becomes the probability changed state. In this way, the game state to be transferred is made different depending on the game state even in the same special figure I. Note that the latent probability changing state may be continued when the special figure I is won during the latent probability changing. Moreover, you may be in any one of a latent probability variation state and a sudden probability variation state. Further, as is clear from FIG. 7, even if the special figure J (small hit) is won, the next gaming state is not changed.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update processing, initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determining random value counter for generating a special figure determining random value for use in a lottery for determining a stop symbol in a special figure variable game Update random number counter. In addition, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a general winning random number counter for generating a normal winning random number used for determining whether or not the normal game is changed is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure determining random value counter and its initial value generating random number counter, and a regular winning random number counter and its initial value generating random number counter. In step S115, the initial values of two initial value generation random number counters are updated respectively. For example, if the initial value generation random number counter can take a numerical value range of 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is obtained. To remember. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). It is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt period).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). If there is a match with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the normal figure starting opening 228 is passed. Judge that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then a special figure determination random number value used in the main control unit 300 is generated. The special figure determining random value counter and the common figure winning random value counter for generating the common winning random value are updated. For example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 in order to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original special figure determination random value counter. If it is determined that the special figure determination random value counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter is acquired. And set in the special figure determination random value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 99, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and the special figure determination random value counter In addition to setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determining random value counter has made one round next, an initial value storage for determining that the common figure winning random number counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value counter may be provided with a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value for special figure 2 or the same counter. May be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure timer number determining random value counter for generating the special figure timer number determining random value for determining the symbol changing time in the special figure changing game or its initial value is updated. In addition, the value of the random number value counter for determining the general-purpose timer number for generating the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the general-purpose variable game or its initial value is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  If there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the full number is 4), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A pair of random numbers for hit determination and special figure determination random values in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value set") is stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area. The same number as the number of reserved special figure 1 held is stored. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of a set of special figure 1 random values having the highest holding order (the first and most recently stored) is stored. In addition to being erased, the remaining special figure 1 random value set data is processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 1 random value set data is added to the next holding order of the special figure 1 random value set data having the lowest (last) holding order. Written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserved number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) A random number value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of 318 is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determining random value is acquired from the special figure determining random value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the acquisition order. A set of random numbers for hit determination and special figure determination random values in the special figure 2 random value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 2 random value set") is stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. The same number as the number of reserved special figure 2 held is stored. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 holding number is decreased, the data of the special figure 2 random value pair with the highest holding order is erased, and the remaining special figure 2 random number values are stored. Processing is performed so that the holding order of the set of data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 holding number increases by one, the new special figure 2 random value set data is written in the next holding order of the special figure 2 random value set data having the lowest holding order.

  If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired from the normal figure winning random number counter as a normal winning number random number value, Store in the usual random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the on / off drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (common symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332) A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. In addition, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold If the number is 1 or more, whether or not to win the result of the floating figure game based on the random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned common random number value storage area A hit determination to be determined is performed, and in the case of winning, a flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of unsuccessful election, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number value counter for determining the normal timer number for generating the normal timer number determining random value is obtained as the random number value for determining the normal timer number. Based on the random number value for determining the general-purpose timer number, one time for displaying the general-purpose figure on the general-purpose display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as the normal-type variable display time. , It is stored in the usual variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. In the special figure prefetching process, when the number of special figure reservations stored in the special figure holding number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the special symbol related lottery symbols are drawn Pre-determination is performed before the success / failure determination in the process. The flow of the special figure prefetching process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure prefetching result storage unit that stores a special figure prefetching result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special figure prefetching process is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 1 in this example. Also, in the RAM 308, there is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 1 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 1 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 1 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 1 start information in the special figure 1 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 1 prefetch result information in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage part. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted, the remaining special figure 1 prefetch information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results of special figure 2 in this example. The RAM 308 is provided with a special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number of prefetch results of the special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit as the special figure 2 prefetch number. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, the main control unit 300 writes new special figure 2 prefetch result information in the next rank after the special figure 2 prefetch result information of the lowest rank (last).

  When erasing the first special figure 2 start information in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the main controller 300 simultaneously erases the first special figure 2 prefetch result information in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. At the same time, 1 is subtracted from the special figure 2 prefetch number stored in the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. When the information of the first special figure 2 prefetching result is deleted, the remaining special figure 2 prefetching information is processed so that the rank of the information is advanced by one.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch process is performed for the increment of the hold, but the special figure prefetch process may be performed for all the hold each time. Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), which will be described later, the prefetch result information may be transmitted only in increments, or the prefetch result information for all suspensions may be transmitted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special figure 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation start, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is shown in FIG. Re-store in the reserved number storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, if the four LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 3 are LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number are red, for example, in order from the smallest LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, 4R big hit flag, small hit flag, loss flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag, a step-up bonus flag, a jump-up bonus flag, Each flag of 4R big hit flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is turned on, the normal probability fluctuation flag is turned on, the step-up bonus flag is turned off, the jump-up bonus flag is turned off, and the actual 4R big hit flag is also turned off, the special figure a and 15R big hit flag shown in FIG. Is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, step-up bonus flag is off, jump-up bonus flag is off, and the actual 4R big hit flag is also off, special figure b, 15R big hit flag Is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, general figure probability fluctuation flag is on, step-up bonus flag is on, jump up button When the eggplant flag is off and the actual 4R jackpot flag is off, the special figure c, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the step-up bonus flag is off, and the jump-up bonus When the flag is also off and the actual 4R jackpot flag is on, the special figure d, when the 4R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure e, 4R jackpot flag Is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure f, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and general figure probability fluctuation flag is on Is the special figure g, and when the off flag is on, the special segment h is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off. There, the setting indicating that the special symbol 2 stop display of the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a), a 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure b), a 15R special jackpot symbol (step-up bonus) (special figure c), and 15R. Big hit symbol (substantial 4R big hit) (Special figure d), 4R special big hit symbol (Special figure e), 4R big hit symbol (Special figure f), 2R big hit symbol (Sudden probability change) (Special figure g), and Outlier symbol (Special figure d) The confirmation display of any one of the symbols in FIG. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the electric support number stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, the subtraction result is changed from 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to an opening / closing solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) of the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is also output. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 4 rounds, or 2 rounds in the present embodiment), the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, in the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting so as to wait for a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set. Also, if the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the power support number (for example, 100 times) is set in the power support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the hourly flag provided in. If the usual probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the power support count storage unit does not set the power support count, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short-time state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is in the normal figure high probability (normal figure certain change) state. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The control state due to the universal figure change, the universal figure change, and the electric Chu extension is collectively referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state. In addition, a time-short state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game is also shortened is called.

In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in gambling.
Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of special figure 2 variable games held is larger than 0, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is notified. 1 is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the starting port 230. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), a special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is obtained from the first (most recently stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtaining and determining whether or not to make a big hit, determining whether or not to make a big hit using a determination table (not shown), and determining the time from the start of the variable display in FIG. 2 to the stop display Then, determination of a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 is performed. After the first special figure 2 random value set is extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared, and the special figure 2 Subtract 1 from the number of holds. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random value extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area (an example of the second starting information storage means) provided in the RAM 308, You may make it perform the above-mentioned determination based on the group of the said special figure 2 random value memorize | stored in this temporary area | region.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the 15R big hit flag, 4R big hit flag value, 2R big hit flag value, step-up bonus flag value stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 are included in the command data. Value, jump up bonus flag value, real 4R jackpot flag value, special figure probability fluctuation flag value, information indicating the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. , 15R jackpot flag, 4R jackpot flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, etc. In the case of a 15R jackpot (or 15R special jackpot) start command, 15R jackpot flag value, jackpot round number, special chart Probability change flag value, step-up bonus flag value, jump-up bonus flag value In the case of a 4R big hit (or 4R special big hit) start command, including the value of the actual 4R big hit flag, the hourly flag, etc., the value of the 4R big hit flag, the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the shorter time In the case of a big hit end command, including a flag value, etc. In the case of a 2R big hit (or 2R special big hit) start command, including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the value of a short time flag, the value of the number of electric support, etc. 2R jackpot flag value, number of jackpot rounds, special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, etc. In the case of jackpot end command, special figure probability variation flag value, hourly flag value, electric support number of times In the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, including the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. The value of a long Invite JP diagram probability change flag case, so that represents the maximum number of jackpot rounds. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  The prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information stored in the prefetch result storage unit together with the types of special figures 1 and 2 in the command data. The prefetch result information in the prefetch result information command may be only an increment or may include prefetch result information for all suspensions. In the present embodiment, the prefetch result information command includes prefetch result information for all suspensions.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, 4R big hit flag value, special figure probability variation flag value, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, and the like are set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, 4R big hit flag, special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described winning prize opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-described winning prize closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information). In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  The following is a summary of the special figure 2 priority fluctuation in the timer interrupt processing in the main control unit 300 described above. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 1 display device capable of executing symbol fluctuation display when a game ball enters the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the symbol variation condition is satisfied. 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, the main control unit 300 can at least control the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and the special figure 1 display device 212 is connected to the special figure 1 start port 230. The symbol variation display can be executed when entering the ball, and the special figure 2 display device 214 can execute the symbol variation display when entering the special symbol 2 starting port 232, and the main control unit 300. When the ball enters the special symbol 1 starting port 230 during the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display start by the special symbol 1 display device 212 can be suspended, and the main control unit 300 displays the symbol variation display. Enter Special Figure 2 Start 232 In such a case, the start of the symbol variation display by the special symbol 2 display device 214 can be suspended, and the main control unit 300 can start the special symbol variation display and the special symbol 2 when the symbol variation display is newly started. When the start of the symbol variation display is suspended for both of the display devices 214, the symbol variation display by the special symbol 2 display device 214 is preferentially started over the symbol variation display by the special symbol 1 display device 212. It is configured.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process (step S224 in FIG. 7) will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of special figure prefetch processing. First, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 2 start information has increased (step S251). It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 starting information has increased, the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetching stored in the special figure 2 prefetching number storage area. Compare with the number. The main control unit 300 compares the special figure 2 hold number with the special figure 2 prefetch number, and if the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, the special figure 2 start information is increased. If it is determined that the special figure 2 holding number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number, it is determined that the special figure 2 start information has not increased.

  When it is determined that the special figure 2 start information is increasing, the main control unit 300 acquires a special figure 2 random number set related to the increased special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229), using the pre-read random number for hit determination and the big hit determination table (not shown), the determination of whether or not the hit / failure is a big hit or small Pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S252). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to predetermine a symbol (stopped symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 2 ( Step S252). These pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and the special figure determination table (see FIGS. 13 and 14) used at the time of the success / failure determination, but a special determination table is prepared for the prefetching process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-determined special figure 2 variable game stop symbol information as a special figure 2 prefetching result in the preemptive space of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. Store (step S253), and proceed to step S254. If the main control unit 300 determines in step S251 that the special figure 2 start information has not increased, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S254 without executing steps S252 and S253.

  Next, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 start information has increased (step S254). The determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 starting information has increased is made, for example, in the same manner as in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is performed by comparing the number of special figure 1 look-ahead stored in FIG. If it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has increased, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the special figure 1 start information has not increased, the special figure prefetch process is terminated.

  In step S255, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not non-electric support is being performed as an undetermined information setting condition. As the undetermined information setting condition, when the pre-reading result notification time is included in the electric support period, it is included in the jackpot game, or the case where the jackpot symbol is pre-determined for the suspension related to the special figure 1 etc. Can be mentioned.

  If the main control unit 300 determines that the undetermined information setting condition is not established, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values related to the increased special figure 1 start information from the special figure 1 start information storage area. Then, the hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the acquired special figure 1 start information are prefetched. Then, prior to the success / failure determination in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), whether or not the success / failure determination becomes a big hit by using the pre-read random number for hit determination and a big hit determination table (not shown). A pre-determination is made as to whether it is a win or a loss (step S256). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the pre-read special figure determination random value and the special figure determination table (not shown) to pre-determine a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special diagram 1 ( Step S256). These pre-determination processes are executed by referring to the jackpot determination table and the special figure determination table (see FIGS. 13 and 14) used at the time of the success / failure determination, but a special determination table is prepared for the prefetching process. May be.

  Next, the main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined special figure 1 variable game stop symbol as the special figure 1 prefetching result in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit provided in the RAM 308. (Step S257), the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S255 that the undetermined information setting condition is satisfied, the main control unit 300 does not prefetch the increased special figure 1 start information, and prefetches the "undecided" information for special figure 1 The result is stored in the result storage unit, and the special figure prefetching process is terminated.

  FIG. 11 illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. FIG. 11A illustrates a state in which the prefetch result is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, and FIG. 11B illustrates the prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. This is an example of the state being performed. Moreover, FIG.11 (c) has illustrated the information memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 in an electric support.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas "prefetch results 1" to the number of special figure variable games that can be held. It has “look-ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 1 start information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas “prefetch result 1” to the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. It has “look-ahead result 4”. The storage areas “prefetch result 1” to “prefetch result 4” are associated with the reservation order of the special figure 2 start information storage area.

In FIG. 11A, “prefetch result 1” indicates that the stop symbol “special drawing J” is stored as the prefetch result 1. Similarly, the stop symbol “special drawing K” is stored in “prefetch result 2”, the stop symbol “special diagram A” is stored in “prefetch result 3”, and the stop symbol “special” is stored in “prefetch result 4”. FIG. K ”is stored.
In FIG. 11B, the stop symbol “special drawing d” is stored in “prefetch result 1”, and the state in which stop symbol information is not stored in “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4” is illustrated. Has been. In FIG. 11, a state in which information such as a stop symbol is not stored is expressed as “none”.
In FIG. 11C, “not-read information” is stored in “prefetch result 1” instead of the stop symbol. When undetermined information is stored, it is expressed as “undetermined information”. In “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4”, “none” in which information such as stop symbols is not stored is stored.

  Next, the special drawing 1 related lottery process in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes, for example, the special drawing 1 related lottery process based on the flow shown in FIG. The special figure 1 related lottery process is executed, for example, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls the ROM 306, the RAM 308, and the like.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special drawing 1 related lottery process. As shown in FIG. 12, in the special drawing 1 related lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not the special figure variable game or the winning game is in progress (step S301). . For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure variable game or the winning game is in progress, the main control unit 300 ends the special figure 1 related lottery process without executing steps S303 to S321 to be described later, and during the special figure variable game or the winning game. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S303.

  In step S303 subsequent to step S301, it is determined whether or not there is a holding ball, that is, whether or not a special figure 1 random number set is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 random value pair is stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S305, and the special figure 1 random value set stores the special figure 1 holding number storage area. If it is determined that it is not stored in the area, the special drawing 1 related lottery process is terminated without executing steps S305 to S321 described later.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 probability variation flag is in an on state. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the special figure 1 probability variation flag is on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S307, and if it determines that the flag is not on, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S309.

  In step S307 subsequent to step S305, the success / failure determination is executed using the high / failure determination probability table for special figure 1 [special figure 1] which will be described later with reference to FIG. 13B. Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a special figure 2 priority change machine that changes in preference to the special figure 2 over the special figure 1, for example, the main control unit 300 has a special figure 2 reservation number storage area. The special figure 2 random value set stored first is read, and if the special figure 2 random value set is not stored, the special figure 1 random value stored first in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. , Read the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 13B, execute the success / failure determination, and proceed to Step S311.

  On the other hand, in step S309 subsequent to step S305, the success / failure determination is performed using the low / probability determination probability table for special figure 1 [special figure 1] described later with reference to FIG. 13 (a). The processing in step S309 is the same as that in step S307 except that the table referred to in the determination of success / failure is the low probability table for success / failure determination [see FIG. 1] shown in FIG. . When the process of step S309 ends, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S311.

  In step S311 following step S307 or step S309, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S319. If the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S319 following step S311, a big hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 applies the special figure determination table for special figure 1 shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 1], a symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321.

  On the other hand, in step S313 following step S311, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the determination result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S317. If the determination result is not a small hit, the main control unit 300 proceeds to step S315.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S313, a small hit symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. Then, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to step S321.

  On the other hand, in step S315 subsequent to step S313, a missing symbol is determined. With reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 14A, the stop symbol after the special figure 1 variable game is determined, and the process proceeds to Step S321.

  In step S321 following step S315, S317, or S319, the variation time is determined according to the symbol. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 variation time determination table shown in FIG. Since the special drawing 2 related lottery process is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. The tables shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 13 (a) to 13 (d) are used in the success / failure determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2 in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. An example of the success / failure determination table is shown. FIG. 13A shows a table for special figure 1 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 13B shows a table for special figure 1 used during the special figure high probability. FIG. 13C shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 13D shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability.

  The success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 13A indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, a numerical value 10220 to 10383, and a numerical value 10384 to 65535. In the third column, the “results of success / failure determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10384 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. The “small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 10220 to 10383.

  The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 13B indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, a numerical value 12186 to 12349, and a numerical value 12350 to 65535. In the third column, “Win / Fail determination result” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 12350 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. , “Small hit” is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 12186 to 12349.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 1 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 1]. For example, if the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the failure determination low probability table [Special figure 1] shown in FIG. 13A is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 13C shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure low probability, and FIG. 13D shows a table for special figure 2 used during the special figure high probability. 13C and 13D, the success / failure determination table [Special Figure 2] includes “Special Figure Probability” in the first column from the left, “Random Number Range” in the second column, “Random Number Range” in the third column, It is composed of items of “result of determination”. The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 13C indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10000, a numerical value 10001 to 10219, and a numerical value 10220 to 65535. In the third column, the “result of determination” is assigned “low probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 10220 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 10219. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 13D indicates that the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates a numerical range (0 to 65535) of random numbers to be compared with the acquired hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 10,000, a numerical value 10001 to 12185, and a numerical value 12186 to 65535. In the third column, “Win / Fail determination result” is assigned “high probability”, “0” to 10000, “loss” corresponding to the values 12186 to 65535, and “big hit” corresponding to the values 10001 to 12185. ing. In FIG. 2, “small hit” is not assigned.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable game is winning (winning) or not winning (missing) with respect to the acquired random number for hit determination. The success / failure determination is performed with reference to the determination table [Special Figure 2]. For example, if the gaming state at the time of the determination of success / failure is a special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. When the gaming state is a special figure low probability state, the low / probability determination low probability table [Special figure 2] shown in FIG. 13C is read from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit probability of special figure 2 is set to 0 as one example in which the small hit probability of special figure 2 is lower than the small hit probability of special figure 1. Of course, a special random number range may be set in the special figure 2 as a small hit. Further, the small hit probability of special figure 2 may be the same as or higher than special figure 1.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 1 variable game is selected with the first probability, and the special figure 2 win / fail judgment result by the special figure 2 variable game is obtained by the first probability. Small hits are selected with a lower second probability.

  The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. Further, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. For this reason, during the electric support, a penalty is given to the player who does not play the game intended by the pachinko machine developer so as to increase the small hit, and the pachinko machine developer is encouraged to play the game as intended. There are cases where it is possible. For example, in the case where the special figure 2 starting port is arranged in the right area of the game board 200, the developer intends that the player makes a right turn in the electric support state. In this case, if the player does not make a right strike and does a left strike different from the developer's intention, the player thinks that it is more advantageous to strike the right if a disadvantageous situation arises for the player. There is a case that can be made. Further, since the small hit probability of the special figure 2 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is low, the small hit in the electric support is often the special figure 1 win / fail determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by changing the production that can be changed when a predetermined change condition is established, the player is indirectly notified that the special figure 2 starting port 232 has not entered too much, thereby suppressing gambling. May be possible.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 2 variable game is lower than the small hit probability of the special figure 1 success / failure determination result based on the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, by reducing the small hits that are disadvantageous in terms of performance in the special figure 2 variable game, it is possible to highlight that the special figure 2 variable game is more advantageous than the special figure 1 variable game and to improve the interest of the game. There is a case.

  FIG. 14 shows a special figure determination table. FIG. 14A shows a special figure determination table [special figure 1] for special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 14B shows a special figure determination table [special figure 2] for special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 14 (a), the special figure determination table [special figure 1] is composed of items of “result of determination”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol” from the left column. In order to facilitate understanding, a “description of symbol” is attached to the right side of the “stop symbol”. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the hit determination using the determination table [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 13 (a) or FIG. 13 (b). As a result of the success / failure determination using the special figure success / failure determination table [Special Figure 1], the case where “small hit” is determined is shown. As a result of the determination, a case where it is determined as “disconnected” is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 14A indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. “Random number range” corresponds to the item “big hit” in the left column “Result of judgment”, numerical value 0-9, numerical value 10-24, numerical value 25-26, numerical value 27-29, numerical value 30-39, numerical value 40 -64, numerical value 65-79, numerical value 80-84, and numerical value 85-99 are divided into nine, corresponding to "small hit", divided into one of numerical values 0-99, corresponding to "out of line" Thus, it is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 99.

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 14A represents a stop symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. The “stop symbol” is “big hit” and the range of the design random number corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 9 “special illustration A (15R probability variation)”, the numerical value 10 to 24 corresponds to “special illustration B (15R)”, "Special figure C (jump-up)" corresponding to numerical values 25-26, "Special figure D (step-up)" corresponding to numerical values 27-29, and "Special figure E (15R) corresponding to numerical values 30-39" (Substantially 4R)), corresponding to numerical values 40-64, "special drawing F (4R probability variation)", corresponding to numerical values 65-79, "special drawing G (4R)", corresponding to numerical values 80-84 Corresponding to “Special Figure H (Sudden Probability Change)” and numerical values 85 to 99, stop symbols “Special Figure I (Hidden Probability Change)” are respectively assigned. The “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special figure J (small hit)” corresponding to the value “0” to “99” in the “random hit” range. Furthermore, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol pattern of “special figure K (out)” corresponding to “0” and “99” in the range of the symbol random number.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to display any of the special figures A to I when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a big hit. Whether to stop and display the stop symbol pattern is determined with reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] for the acquired random number value for special figure determination. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays the stop symbol form of the special figure J on the special figure 1 display device 212 when the determination result based on the entrance to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is a small hit. Decide what to do. Further, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 1 display device 212 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure K when the determination result based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230 is out of place. To decide.

  In FIG. 14B, the special figure determination table [special figure 2] is composed of items of “result of determination”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol” from the left column. In order to facilitate understanding, a “description of symbol” is attached to the right side of the “stop symbol”. The “win / fail judgment result” in the left column is divided into “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of line”. “Big hit” indicates a case where it is determined as “big hit” as a result of the success / failure determination using the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 13 (c) or FIG. 13 (d). The case where it is determined as “out of” as a result of the determination as to whether or not the figure determination table [special drawing 2] is used is shown.

  The item “random number range” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 14B indicates the numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the acquired special figure determination random number value. “Random number range” corresponds to the item “big hit” in the left column “Win / Fail determination result”, numerical values 0 to 19, numerical values 20 to 29, numerical values 30 to 39, numerical values 40 to 49, numerical values 50 to 79, numerical values 80. -89, and numerical values 90-99, and is divided into one of numerical values 0-99 corresponding to "out".

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 14B represents a stop symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. “Stop symbol” is “special symbol a (15R probability variation)” corresponding to a numerical value 0-19 corresponding to “big hit” and a range of symbol random numbers, “special symbol b (15R)” corresponding to numerical values 20-29, “Special figure c (step-up)” corresponding to the numerical values 30 to 39, “Special figure d (15R (substantially 4R))” corresponding to the numerical values 40 to 49, “Special figure corresponding to the numerical values 50 to 79” e (4R probability variation) ”,“ Special figure f (4R) ”corresponding to numerical values 80 to 89, and“ Special figure g (Sudden probability variation) ”corresponding to numerical values 90 to 99, respectively. Yes. Further, the “stop symbol” is assigned a stop symbol form of “special symbol h (missing)” corresponding to a numerical value of 0 to 99 and a “random” symbol random number range.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to display any one of the special figure a to the special figure g when the determination result based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is a big hit. Whether to stop and display the stop symbol pattern is determined for the acquired special figure determination random value with reference to the special figure determination table [Special Figure 2]. In addition, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes the special figure 2 display device 214 to stop and display the stop symbol form of the special figure h when the result of the determination of winning / failing based on the winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232 is out of place. To decide.

  FIG. 15 shows an example of the special figure 1 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interruption process. The data table shown in FIG. 15 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 15, the special figure 1 variable display time determination table includes four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range” and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 1 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In this embodiment, there are five sub-tables from the first row to the fifth row. The sub-table whose “stop symbol” is the first row is used when the stop symbol is special figure A, special figure B, or special figure D to special figure G. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table of the first row is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The sub-table whose “stop symbol” is the second row is used when the stop symbol is special figure C, special figure I, or special figure J. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table in the second row is divided into two values, a numerical value 0 to 30000 and a numerical value 30001 to 65535. When the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, an effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 30001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the normal reach lose / chance stop is selected. Here, the normal reach loss / chance eye stop is a display for stopping the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the normal reach is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The sub-table whose “stop symbol” is the third row is used when the stop symbol is the special symbol H. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table in the third row is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 30000, a numerical value 30001 to 45000, and a numerical value 45001 to 65535. When the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 30000, an effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is the chance stop is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numbers 30001 to 45000, the effect that the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach A lose / chance stop is selected. . Here, the super reach A losing / chance stop is a display in which the chance eye is stopped after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach A is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of values 45001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss / chance stop is selected. . Here, the super reach B losing / chance eye stop is a display that stops the chance eye after the effect of notifying the decorative symbol display device 208 that the super reach B is off is completed. The special figure stop symbol is stopped and displayed after at least the chance display.

  The sub-table whose “stop symbol” is the fourth row is used when the stop symbol is special figure K, and the game state at the time of determination is non-electric support and the number of holds in special figure 1 is three. . The “random number selection range” in the sub-table in the fourth row is divided into four values: a numerical value 0-65000, a numerical value 65001-65400, a numerical value 65401-65500, and a numerical value 65501-65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 65000, the effect that the variation time is 3000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shortened is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65400, the effect that the variation time is 10,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of numerical values 65401 to 65500, an effect in which the variation time is 40,000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach A lose is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of numerical values 65501 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  The sub-table where the “stop symbol” is the fifth row is the case where the stop symbol is special figure K, and the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is non-electric support, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0 to 2, Alternatively, it is used when the game state at the time of the determination of success / failure is electric support and the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0-3. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table of the fifth row is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, the effect that the variation time is 10000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super Reach A Loss with a variation time of 40000 ms is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  FIG. 16 shows an example of the special figure 2 variable display time determination table for determining the variable time of the symbol fluctuation stop display in the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 2 variable display time determination table is mainly used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 16 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. As shown in FIG. 16, the special figure 2 variable display time determination table includes four items of “stop symbol”, “variable time”, “random number selection range”, and “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It is configured.

  In the special figure 2 variable time determination table, sub-tables are divided for each item “stop symbol”. In this embodiment, there are five sub-tables from the first row to the fifth row. The sub-table whose “stop symbol” is in the first row is used when the stop symbol is special figure a to special figure f. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table of the first row is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 1000, a numerical value 1001 to 20000, and a numerical value 20001 to 65535. If the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 1000, the effect that the variation time is 15000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per normal reach is selected. If the random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of 1001 to 20000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach A is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 20001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is per super reach B is selected.

  The sub-table whose “stop symbol” is the second row is used when the stop symbol is the special symbol g. This sub-table is used in common regardless of whether the game state at the time of the determination is a power support or non-power support. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table in the second row is divided into three values: a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, and a numerical value 60001 to 65535. When the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, an effect that the variation time is 12000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a chance stop is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is in the range of 50001 to 60000, an effect in which the variation time is 45000 ms and the effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach A lose / chance stop is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of numerical values 60001 to 65535, an effect that the variation time is 65000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach B loss / chance stop is selected.

  The sub-table whose “stop symbol” is the third row is used when the stop symbol is special figure h, and the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is electric support, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 1 to 3 It is done. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table in the third row is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. When the acquired random number for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical value 0 to 65535, the effect that the variation time is 1500 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is an extremely shortened loss is selected.

  The sub-table with “stop symbol” in the fourth row is used when the stop symbol is special figure h, and the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is electric support and the number of holds in special figure 2 is zero. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table of the fourth row is divided into one of numerical values 0 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of numerical values 0 to 65535, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost with a variation time of 8000 ms is selected.

  The sub-table whose “stop symbol” is the fifth row is for the case where the stop symbol is special figure h, and the game state at the time of determination of success / failure is non-electric support and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0-3. Used. The “random number selection range” in the sub-table of the fifth row is divided into four values of a numerical value 0 to 50000, a numerical value 50001 to 60000, a numerical value 60001 to 65000, and a numerical value 65001 to 65535. If the acquired special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of the numerical value 0 to 50000, the effect that the variation time is 8000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is lost is selected. If the random number value for determining the special figure timer number is within the range of the numerical values 50001 to 60000, the effect that the variation time is 10000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is normal reach loss is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is in the range of 60001 to 65000, an effect in which the effect time on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super Reach A Loss with a variation time of 40000 ms is selected. If the special figure timer number determination random number value is within the range of the numerical values 65001 to 65535, an effect in which the variation time is 60000 ms and the effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 is Super reach B loss is selected.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S401 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. Details of the command processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, when it is detected that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

  In step S413 following step S411, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 subsequent to step S415, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S403. .

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S421 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of random numbers for other effects, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S413 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input. In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S801 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S803.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 18A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, Example 1 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20 are flowcharts showing in more detail the command processing (step S407) in the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 according to the present embodiment. The first sub-control unit 400 as the effect control means determines whether or not a 15R jackpot start command has been received in the command process (step S1101). If the 15R jackpot start command has been received, the effect change process (step S1103) is executed. That is, when at least start control of 15R big hit (first big hit) is performed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes the effect change process (step S1103), assuming that the effect operation change condition is satisfied. Control is performed to cause the rendering means to perform the rendering operation selected from the motion candidates. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, there are cases in which the player's interest can be improved because various effects can be performed.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the effect change process (step S1103) in the command process in the first sub-control unit 400 in more detail. In the effect changing process, the first sub-control unit 400 first checks the count value K of the music increase counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1201).

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 updates the effect list (step S1203). The effect list is provided in the RAM 408. In a predetermined area of the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, a plurality of effects data for effects that can be selected by the player is stored. In the effect data storage area, a plurality of performance song data specified by a song header i consisting of a song code “Mi” (i is a song number) and a song title “tmi” (i is a song number) and correspondingly The image data to be executed is stored. For example, the first song data and image data are stored in association with the song code M1 of the song header 1 and the song title tm1: “may be there”, the song code M2 of the song header 2, the song title tm2: The second song data and image data are stored in association with “the universe of miracle”, the song code M3 in the song header 3 and the song title tm3: the third song data and image data in association with “Your Fragrance” Is stored in association with the song code M4 of the song header 4 and the song title tm4: “Mega! Giga! Summer!”. Note that the effect may be one in which the background image does not change and only the melody changes, or the background image or the like changes in accordance with the change in the melody.

  In the effect list, song headers for effects that can be selected by the player are stored. In the initial state, for example, a song code M1 of the song header 1 and a song title tm1 are stored in the effect list as default songs. The first sub-control unit 400 uses the counter value K of the song increase counter confirmed in step S1201 to add K song headers from song header 2 to song header K + 1 from the effect data storage area to the effect list. Thereby, K + 1 music headers from music header 1 to music header K + 1 are stored in the effect list. If step S1203 is performed, the effect change process of step S1103 of FIG. 19 will be complete | finished.

  Although the effect change process (step S1103) of the present embodiment has been described taking as an example a case where an effect in the effect list is selected and executed during the big hit game, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect in the effect list may be selected during the jackpot game, and the effect during the special figure variable game after the end of the jackpot game may be changed to the selected effect. In this case, in the effect changing process (step S1103), the execution of the effect is prepared, and when the special figure change start command is received, the effect executing process similar to this example may be performed.

  When the effect change process in step S1103 in FIG. 19 is finished, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process for causing the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute an effect for changing the big hit effect and a big hit effect for 15R big hit in step S1109. For this reason, the command processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the 15R jackpot start command has not been received, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a 2R jackpot start command has been received (step S1105). If the 2R jackpot start command is received, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of adding 1 to the count value K of the music increase counter (step S1107). Next, in step S1109, the first sub-control unit 400 executes processing for executing a 2R jackpot big hit effect and ends the command processing.

  When determining that the 2R jackpot start command is not received in step S1105, the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the jackpot command is received (step S1111). If it is determined that the big hit command is received, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process (step S1113) for executing the big hit effect process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing in more detail the big hit effect processing (step S1113) in the command processing in the first sub-control unit 400. In the big hit effect processing, the first sub-control unit 400 first checks whether or not the big hit is a changeable effect. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a 15R big hit from the received big hit middle command (step S1301). In this embodiment, the big hits that can be changed are 15R series big hits (15R normal big hit, 15R probability variable big hit, and jump-up bonus and step-up bonus, which will be described later). It may be possible to change the effect in other big hits, such as a big hit, and in that case, the same judgment process as in step S1301 may be executed for each big hit middle command. Further, as will be described later in the embodiment, even in the case of a 15R big hit, for example, in the case of a substantial 4R big hit, the effect may not be changed.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that it is not a 15R big hit, it is not a big hit that can be changed, so the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1307 and executes each big hit effect, and then the big hit effect processing Exit.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the 15R system is a big hit, the first sub-control unit 400 then checks whether or not the period during which the effect can be changed has ended. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is finished up to 2R (step S1303). In this example, the period in which the production can be changed is the first round and the second round, but the period in which the production can be changed varies depending on the type of jackpot (for example, in the case of 15R special jackpot) From 1R start to 2R end, or when determined with a chance button, in the case of JUB described later, in the middle of 1R to 2R end, in the case of SUB described later 5R start to 5R end) for each type of jackpot It is also possible to determine the production changeable period.

  If it is determined in step S1303 that the big hit game has not ended up to 2R, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1305 and executes a process of displaying the updated effect for changing the big hit effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 returns to step S1303, and determines whether or not the big hit game has ended up to 2R. In the process of displaying the updated effect for changing the big hit effect in step S1305, a thick frame surrounding the effect selected from the effect list according to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136, direction key not shown). Processing to change the position (described later) is also performed.

  If it is determined in step S1303 that the big hit game has been completed up to 2R, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S1309, performs a process of executing the selected effect, and ends the big hit effect process.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S1111 that it has not received a jackpot command, it determines whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (step S1115). When determining that the jackpot end command has been received, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process (step S1117) for executing the jackpot end effect.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the jackpot end command has not been received, as shown in FIG. 20, whether or not the current gaming state is a normal gaming state (a special low-probability normal low-probability state). Is determined (step S1119). If in the normal gaming state, the count value K of the music increase counter is reset to K = 0 (step S1121). Further, the effect list is set to the initial state, and only the song code M1 and song title tm1 of the song header 1 of the default song are stored as the effect-selectable song headers for the player. Next, the command processing is terminated. If it is not in the normal gaming state, the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S1123 that the number of times of electric support is 0 by processing, for example, command processing related to special figure variable game or a command including the number of times of electric support as information. Then, it is determined that the time is short and a predetermined process is executed. Next, after executing other processing, the command processing is terminated.

  As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 as the effect control means of the present embodiment is a 2R big hit (for example, a special figure high probability state, which is the second gaming state after the end gaming which is the first gaming state). The number of occurrences of the second hit) is counted as the count value K of the song increase counter (steps S1105 and S1107), and the number of song headers that are production operations included in the production list that is a production operation candidate is changed (increased). However, the number of occurrences of small hits (first hits) in which the second game state after the end of the hit game maintains the second game state before the start of the hit game is the count value K of the song increase counter The count is not performed (step S1105), and the number of song headers included in the effect list is not changed.

  In this embodiment, various processes are performed based on the jackpot start command, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine the start of a special figure variable game whose winning / failing determination result is a big hit, and of course, perform the effect change process (step S1103) and the count process (step S1107) at the start of the special figure variable game.

  In this embodiment, the number of 2R jackpot start commands sent from the main control unit 300 is counted by the first sub control unit 400. In this embodiment, since neither the main control unit 300 nor the first sub control unit 400 stores the count value K for backup, the count value K is erased when the pachinko machine 100 recovers after power interruption. The On the other hand, the count value K may be backed up by the main control unit 300 or the first sub control unit 400, and the count value K may be restored after power recovery.

  FIG. 23 shows a temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis of FIG. 23 shows a time series, and time passes from the left to the right. The upper part of FIG. 23 shows a change in the game state by the special figure 2 state update process (step S225) and the special figure 1 state update process (step S227) in the main control unit 300 as the game control means. The game control means is capable of at least starting control of the first gaming state (winning gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and at least starting the second gaming state (gaming state other than winning game). It is possible. In FIG. 23, the change of the gaming state over time is represented by the height of the waveform with the second gaming state as a reference level.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the height from the reference level is divided into three stages, and the execution state of the small hit game is shown at the first level closest to the reference level. Moreover, the execution state of the 2R big hit (latency probability change or sudden probability change) game at the second level higher than the first level is shown. Moreover, the execution state of 15R big hit game is shown in the 3rd level higher than the 2nd level.

  The middle part of FIG. 23 shows a special drawing state and a normal drawing state in the second gaming state. The special drawing state is shown on the upper side, and the normal drawing state is shown on the lower side. The special figure and the normal figure state have a special figure low probability ("Special figure state" is indicated as "Low" in the figure) and the general figure low probability ("Normal figure state" in the figure is indicated as "Low") The second gaming state that is) is the normal gaming state.

  The second game state in which the state of the special figure and the normal figure has a special figure high probability (indicated as “high” in the “special figure state” in the figure) and a low probability of the normal figure is a latent probability changing state. The second game state in which the state of the special figure and the normal figure becomes the high probability of the special figure with the high probability of the special figure (indicated as “high” in the “normal figure state” in the figure) is the probability change state (the special figure high) Probability state). The second gaming state in which the state of the special figure and the normal figure has a low special figure probability and a high probability of the special figure is a short-time state (also referred to as an electric support state). Since the probability variation state is not only a special figure but also a general figure is a high probability state, it can be said to be a short-time state.

  The lower part of FIG. 23 shows the change of the count value K of the song increase counter by the item “count”, and the time when the player can select the effect and the number of selectable effects by the item “changeable effect”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, from the left, first, when the second gaming state is the normal gaming state, the start information is acquired and a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the special control by the main control unit 300 as the failure determination means. The result of the success / failure determination in the related lottery process is the first success / failure determination result (for example, the stop symbol is special figure J), and the first game state is obtained by the special figure state update process by the main control unit 300 as game control means. The state where the small hit game which is the first hit of the game is executed is shown.

  As is apparent from the flowchart of FIG. 19, the first sub-control unit 400 generates a small hit in which the second gaming state after the end of the winning game maintains the second gaming state before the starting of the winning game. However, 1 is not added to the count value K of the music increase counter (steps S1105 and S1107). For this reason, the counter value K maintains 0 (zero).

  Next, when the second game state after the small hit game is the normal game state, the start information is acquired and a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the result of the success / failure determination in the special drawing related lottery process by the main control unit 300 is obtained. The second determination result (for example, the stop symbol is special figure I), which is more advantageous than the small hit which is the first hit in the first gaming state by the special figure state update processing by the main control unit 300. The state where the 2R big hit game which is the second hit is executed is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 23, a 2R big hit game is started in which the second game state after the end of the hit game state is a latent probability change.

  In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 as the effect control means receives the start command of the 2R big hit (second win) that becomes the second gaming state, for example, the special figure high probability state after the winning game ends. Then, 1 is added to the count value K of the music increase counter (steps S1105 and S1107). Therefore, the count value K = 1 as shown in the item “count” in FIG.

  Next, when the second game state after the 2R big hit game is the latent probability changing state, the start information is acquired and a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, and the result of the success / failure determination in the special drawing related lottery process by the main control unit 300 is obtained. This is the first success / failure determination result, and shows a state where the small hit game which is the first of the first game states is executed by the special state update process by the main control unit 300 as the game control means. ing.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, the first sub-control unit 400 generates a small hit in which the second gaming state after the end of the winning game maintains the second gaming state before the starting of the winning game. However, 1 is not added to the count value K of the music increase counter (step S1105). For this reason, the counter value K is maintained at 1. In the second game state after the end of the small hit game, the latent probability changing state is maintained.

  Next, when the second gaming state is the latent probability changing state, the start information is acquired and a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the result of the determination of whether or not the special control related lottery process is performed by the main control unit 300 is the second success / failure determination. The result (for example, the stop symbol is special figure H or special figure g), and the 2R big hit game which is the second hit in the first game state is executed by the special figure state update processing by the main control unit 300. The state is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 23, a 2R big hit game is started in which the second gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state suddenly changes to a certain probability (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state).

  In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 as an effect control means starts a 2R big hit (second win) start command that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state as the second gaming state after the winning game is ended. And 1 is added to the count value K of the music increase counter (steps S1105 and S1107). Therefore, the count value K = 2 as shown in the item “count” in FIG.

  Next, the start information is acquired when the second gaming state is suddenly changed and the predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination of the success / failure in the special drawing related lottery process by the main control unit 300 is the third success / failure determination As a result, for example, the stop symbol is special figure B or special figure b, and the 15R big hit game which is the first big hit of the first gaming state is executed by the special figure state update process by the main control unit 300. The state is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 23, since the big hit game is 15R normal big hit, the second game state after the end of the hit game state is a short time state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state).

  In this case, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the 15R big hit start command as shown in FIG. 19 (step S1101), and executes the effect changing process shown in FIG. 21 (step S1103). First, the first sub-control unit 400 checks the count value K of the music increase counter provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1201). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 updates the effect list provided in the RAM 408 (step S1203). In this example, since the counter value K = 2, as shown in the item “changeable effect” in FIG. 23, songs are added to the effect list by the counter value K of the song increase counter in addition to the default song. Thereby, the three effects of the song headers 1, 2, and 3 are stored in the effect list.

  Next, when the 15R big hit game is finished, the second game state becomes a short time state. Thereafter, when the predetermined number of special figure variable games are executed and the time-short state is completed, the second game state becomes the normal game state. As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the first sub-control unit 400 resets the count value K of the music increase counter (K = 0) through the determination process in step S1119.

  In this embodiment, the timing for resetting the count value K of the music increase counter is the first special figure variable game start after the end of the short time, but it can be reset at any timing in the special figure low-probability low-precision state. That's fine.

  The default song (production) indicates a song (production) prepared from the beginning. Even if the count value K is 0, the default song (effect) can be executed. Even when the count value K = 0, the effect selection screen may be displayed. Further, when the count value K = 0, the default effect may be selected, and the effect may be started without displaying the effect selection screen.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 is capable of at least performing the start control of the small hit game in the hit game state when the result of the determination is a small hit. In addition, when the result of the determination is 2R big hit, it is possible to perform at least the start control of the 2R big hit game in the hit gaming state, and the 2R big hit is more advantageous than the small hit. The main control unit 300 is capable of at least starting a special figure high probability state, for example, and the first sub-control unit 400 serving as an effect control means is, for example, when start control for 15R big hit is performed. For example, it is possible to control the speaker 120 or the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform, for example, any one of the effects 1 to 3 selected by the player from the effects stored in the effect list. The first sub-control unit 400 can increase the number of effects included in the effect list according to the number of occurrences of 2R jackpot game that will be in the special figure high probability state after the winning game state ends. The first sub-control unit 400 does not enter the special figure high probability state after the winning game state ends, for example, by the first occurrence shown in FIG. 23 (that is, the first small hit game in the drawing), the effects included in the effect list It is characterized by not changing the number of.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the second gaming state is a time-short state or an electric support state (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a time-short state or an electric support state) in which the success / failure determination condition is easily established, and the production control The means is characterized in that the number of effects included in the effect list is not increased according to the number of occurrences of a small hit that becomes a short time state after the winning game state ends.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since various effects can be performed, the player's interest may be improved. In addition, the number of effects that can be selected can be changed according to the number of occurrences of 2R big hits that become a special figure high probability state after the winning game state ends. It is possible to prevent the number of selectable effects from changing. Thereby, a player's interest can be improved by performing various productions. In addition, not only small hits that do not become the special high probability state after the end of the winning game state, but also a predetermined condition is established that the gaming state after the end of the winning game maintains the gaming state before the start of the winning game. A small hit (for example, a small hit sandwiched between two 2R big hits in FIG. 23) does not add 1 to the count value K of the music increase counter, thereby giving the player a 2R big hit which is disadvantageous to the 15R big hit. May be more compelling. Further, since a small hit where the predetermined condition is not satisfied can be treated as a 2R big hit (gase) where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player may be expected.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the small hits during the short-time state from being included in the song addition condition, so that a disadvantageous small hit occurs in terms of performance for the player during the short-time state. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations. In addition, by reducing the small hits during the short-running state, there are cases where the game can proceed smoothly and a decrease in game motivation can be prevented.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 is capable of at least performing start control of 15R big hit game in the winning game state when the determination result is 15R big hit. Further, the main control unit 300 can at least perform start control of 2R big hit game, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared to 15R big hit game in the winning game state when the result of the determination of success / failure is 2R big hit. The maximum number of times the attacker's open / close state changes during 2R big hit is the same as the maximum number of times the attacker's open / close state changes during small hit, and at least 15R big hit start control is performed The first sub-control unit 400 reduces the number of effects included in the effect list according to the number of occurrences of 2R jackpots that become a special figure high probability state after the winning game state ends. And characterized in that capable of Kutomo changed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, there are 15R big hits and 2R big hits, and an effect can be selected at the time of 15R big hit. Since the number of performances that can be selected increases with the occurrence of 2R jackpot, for example, when the advantageous 15R jackpot continues, there are cases where the player can be pleased even if the disadvantageous 2R jackpot is hit. Further, there may be a case where a great feeling can be given in terms of player performance. Further, since the effect can be changed at the time of 15R big hit, which is advantageous for the player, the effect at the time of 15R big hit may be made more gorgeous and the game motivation may be improved. In addition, since the number of occurrences of 2R jackpot is counted and the effect can be changed at the time of 15R jackpot, there are cases where a player who has been disadvantaged with 2R jackpot can be rescued in terms of performance. It can be said that it is a disappointing big hit disappointment prize. Furthermore, there may be a case where the second big hit and the first big hit, which are advantageous in terms of production, can be emphasized by the disadvantageous small hit in terms of production.

  FIG. 24 shows a time series of the 2R big hit (latency probability change and sudden probability change) and the small hit attack release pattern in this example. In FIG. 24, the small hit, 2R big hit (latency probability change), small hit, 2R big hit (sudden probability change) shown in the first half of the time series of FIG. 23 will be described as an example. The upper part of FIG. 24 shows the change of the gaming state by the special figure 2 state update process (step S225) and the special figure 1 state update process (step S227) in the main control unit 300, as in the upper part of FIG. . In the middle part of FIG. 24, items “big hit round”, “attacker open”, and “attacker closed” are shown from the top. “Big hit round” indicates the number of rounds in 2R big hit game. Even in small hits, the attacker opens and closes twice in principle, but each attacker open and close operation is independent of the round. The items “attacker opening” and “attacker closing” indicate the opening / closing operation of the attacker, and the attacker is opened with a higher pulse with the attacker closing as a reference level. 24 shows an effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Now, from the left in the example shown in FIG. 24, starting information is acquired in the normal gaming state (also referred to as a normal state), a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, and the determination of success / failure in the special drawing related lottery process by the main control unit 300 is made. Is the first winning / failing determination result (for example, the stop symbol is the special figure J), and the small hit game that is the first hit in the first gaming state by the special figure state update process by the main control unit 300. A small hit gaming state (also referred to as a small hit state) is shown.

  In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as “Special Figure H” and “Special Figure I” (in this embodiment, twice). However, if a predetermined amount of game value (for example, 10 balls are entered) is acquired by the first attacker release, the second attacker release is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the small hit gaming state, the production 1 is executed in the period from the start of the game to the first attacker release based on the control by the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, effect 2 is executed in a period including the first attacker opening and closing and the second attacker opening and closing. Furthermore, the production 3 is executed during the period from the second time the attacker closes until the game ends.

  Next, when the second game state after the small hit game is the normal game state, the start information is acquired and a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the result of the success / failure determination in the special drawing related lottery process by the main control unit 300 is obtained. The second determination result (for example, the stop symbol is special figure I), which is more advantageous than the small hit which is the first hit in the first gaming state by the special figure state update processing by the main control unit 300. The state where the 2R big hit game which is the second hit is executed is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the 2R big hit game is started in which the second game state after the end of the hit game becomes the latent probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the 2R big hit game state in which the latent probability changes after the hit game ends, the production 1 is executed during the period from the start of the game to the 1R attacker release based on the control by the first sub-control unit 400. The Also, effect 2 is executed in a period including opening and closing of the 1R attacker and opening and closing of the 2R attacker. Furthermore, the production 3 is executed during the period from the closing of the 2Rth attacker to the end of the game. As described above, in this embodiment, the effect executed in the 2R big hit game in which the second game state after the end of the hit game is the latent probability change and the effect executed in the small hit game are the same. .

  As shown in FIG. 24, even when the small hit game is won in the latent probability change state after the end of the 2R big hit game, the performance executed in the small hit game is the same as the small hit game and the 2R big hit game described above. is there.

  Next, after the small hit game, the start information is acquired when the second gaming state is the latent probability changing state, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the result of the success / failure determination in the special drawing related lottery processing by the main control unit 300 is obtained. A small hit that is the second winning / failing determination result (for example, the stop symbol is special figure H or special figure g) and is the first hit of the first gaming state by the special figure state update process by the main control unit 300. A state in which a 2R jackpot game, which is a more advantageous second hit, is executed is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the 2R big hit game is started in which the second game state after the hit game is suddenly changed.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the 2R big hit gaming state that suddenly changes in probability after the winning game is over, the effect A is executed during the period from the start of the game to the 1R attacker release based on the control by the first sub-control unit 400. The In addition, effect B is executed in a period including opening and closing of the 1R attacker and opening and closing of the 2R attacker. Further, the production C is executed during the period from the closing of the 2R attacker to the end of the game. In the present embodiment, the effects A, B, and C that are executed in the 2R big hit game that suddenly changes the probability after the winning game is finished are the effects that are executed in the 2R big hit game that changes the latent probability after the small hit game and the hit game ends. The production is different from 1, 2, and 3. It is to be noted that production A and production 1, production B and production 2, production C and production 3 are made the same production, the production executed in the 2R big hit game that suddenly changes after the winning game ends, the small hit game and the winning game Of course, it may be the same as the effect executed in the 2R big hit game that becomes the latent probability change after the end of the game.

  FIG. 25 shows an effect (part 1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. FIGS. 25A to 25J show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 25 (a) to (e) show the effects of the first small hit game in FIGS. 23 and 24, and (f) to (j) are the 2R big hit games (latency probability change) next to the small hit game. Shows the production.

  FIG. 25A shows a state in which “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. In addition, players familiar with the game know that when this stop symbol is displayed, it may develop into a small hit, a latent probability change (2R big hit), or a jump-up bonus (15R positive change big hit) described later. I have great expectations.

  FIG. 25B shows an execution example of effect 1 described in FIG. In the production 1, the decoration symbol stop display “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and a large samurai character image (hereinafter referred to as “samurai”) is displayed in the center. ) Is screaming "Wait!"

  FIG. 25C shows an execution example of effect 2 described in FIG. In production 2, the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of the samurai running to the right is displayed large in the center. FIG. 25C-1 shows a state where the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is opened. FIG. 25C-2 shows a state where the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is closed. During the period in which the production 2 is executed, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 repeats the states of FIGS. 25 (c-1) and (c-2) twice. The door closed state of FIG. 25 (c-2) is once from the door open state of FIG. 25 (c-1). The interval at which the open / close state of the attacker 234 changes at this time is an interval at which the game ball (game medium) cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum).

  FIG. 25D shows an execution example of effect 3 described in FIG. In the effect 3, the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display of “general mode entry” is displayed on the entire display area with the background of the spider. In the display indicating this mode, the name of the mode may indicate the gaming state after the big hit.

  FIG. 25 (e) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. An image indicating that the general mode is in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed, and in the center of the display area, an image in which the decorations 0 to 9 are sequentially moved from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas. (Indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is displayed.

  25 (f) to 25 (j) show effects in 2R big hit (latency probability variation) in FIGS. 23 and 24. As is clear from the figure, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 25A to 25E are executed as the effects shown in FIGS. The door member 234a of the attacker 234 repeats the states of FIGS. 25 (h-1) and (h-2) for 2R during the period of FIG. The door closed state in FIG. 25 (h-2) from the door open state in FIG. 25 (h-1) is 1R. At this time, the interval at which the opening / closing state of the attacker 234 changes is the same as the interval at which the opening / closing state of the attacker 234 changes during the small hit game, and the interval at which the game ball (game medium) cannot enter (for example, the 1.5 seconds). Also, as shown in FIGS. 25 (i) and 25 (j), a decorative symbol stop display is displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. “General mode entry” is displayed. In addition, a display indicating the general mode is displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure variable game is started.

  Even a player who is unfamiliar with the game of the pachinko machine 100 has a sense of expectation that the game state in the general mode may shift to a game state advantageous to the player. In addition, players who are accustomed to gaming may be more likely to win a 15R jackpot because they know that the game state in the general mode may be a normal game state or a latent probability change state. Knowing that there is no game can be enjoyed greatly.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the interval at which the open / close state of the variable winning opening 234 changes during both 2R big hit (second big hit) and small hit is the interval at which the game ball cannot enter (for example, The open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum).

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the opening / closing operations of the second big hit and the small hitter are the same in that the game ball cannot enter, and therefore, depending on the establishment of a predetermined change condition, the small hit or the second big hit Can be determined based on whether or not the number of songs is increased in the effect change process executed later in the 15R jackpot game, so that the player can keep expectation until a predetermined change condition is satisfied. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the result of the determination is a small hit of the first determination result, the first combination of decorative symbols (decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the result of the determination of success / failure is the 2R big hit of the second determination result, the second combination of decorative symbols (decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3) is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. The combination of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed in the area and stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are combinations of the same decorative symbols (decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration). 3).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the combination of the stop symbols of the 2R big hit and the small hit decoration symbols is the same, so whether or not the production is changed to the small hit or the 2R big hit due to the establishment of a predetermined change condition. Therefore, there is a case where the player can continue to have an expectation until a predetermined change condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 26 shows an effect (part 2) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. FIGS. 26A to 26J show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 26 (a) to (e) show the effects in the next small hit game of the 2R big hit game (latency probability change) in FIGS. 23 and 24, and (f) to (j) are the next of the small hit game. This shows the effects of 2R jackpot game (suddenly probable). The effects related to the small hit game shown in (a) to (e) of FIG. 26 are the same as the effects related to the small hit game shown in (a) to (e) of FIG.

  26 (f) to 26 (j) show effects in 2R big hit (sudden probability change) in FIG. 23 and FIG. FIG. 26 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. Furthermore, a player who is accustomed to the game has great expectation because he knows that there is a possibility of sudden change (2R big hit) when this stop symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 26G shows an execution example of the effect A described in FIG. In the effect A, the decorative symbol stop display “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the samurai screams “Go! Is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (h) shows an execution example of the effect B described in FIG. In the effect B, the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of the samurai carrying the car box and running toward the right is displayed large in the center. FIG. 26 (h-1) shows a state where the door member 234 a of the attacker 234 is opened. FIG. 26 (h-2) shows a state where the door member 234 a of the attacker 234 is closed. The door closed state in FIG. 26 (h-2) from the door open state in FIG. 26 (h-1) is 1R. During the period in which the effect B is being executed, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 repeats the states of FIGS. 26 (h-1) and (h-2) 2R. The interval at which the opening / closing state of the attacker 234 changes at this time is the same as the interval at which the opening / closing state of the attacker 234 changes at the small hit or 2R big hit (latency probability change). Maximum 1.5 seconds).

  FIG. 26I shows an execution example of the effect C described in FIG. In the effect C, the decorative symbol stop display is displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display of “super general mode entry” is displayed on the entire display area against the background of the spider.

  FIG. 26 (j) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. A display indicating the super general mode is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area, the decorations 0 to 9 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas. An image is displayed.

  Even a player who is not accustomed to the game of the pachinko machine 100 has a sense of expectation that the game state in the super general mode may shift to a game state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, since the player who is accustomed to the game knows that the super general mode is suddenly in a probable state, he can enjoy the game greatly by knowing that there is a high possibility of 15R jackpot.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the interval at which the open / close state of the variable winning opening 234 changes during both 2R big hit (second big hit) and small hit is the interval at which the game ball cannot enter (for example, The open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the opening / closing operation of the second big hit and the small hit attacker is the same in that the game ball cannot enter, so that the predetermined change condition is satisfied, Since it is possible to determine whether or not the second big hit is based on whether or not the song has been changed, there is a case where the player can continue to have an expectation until a predetermined change condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 27 shows the 15R big hit game displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example in time series. The state shown in FIG. 27 corresponds to the 15R big hit shown in the second half of the time series of FIG. The upper part of FIG. 27 shows the change in the gaming state by the special figure 2 state update process (step S225) and the special figure 1 state update process (step S227) in the main control unit 300, as in the upper part of FIG. . In the middle part of FIG. 27, items “big hit round”, “attacker open”, and “attacker closed” are shown from the top. “Big hit round” indicates the number of rounds in 15R big hit game. The items “attacker opening” and “attacker closing” indicate the opening / closing operation of the attacker, and the attacker is opened with a higher pulse with the attacker closing as a reference level. In addition, the item “production change” in the lower part of FIG. 27 indicates a period during which the player can change the production and a period during which the player cannot change during the attacker opening / closing period of 1R to 15R. The item “effect to be executed” indicates the content of the effect executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example shown in FIG. 27, from the left, starting information is acquired in the normal gaming state, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established, and the result of the success / failure determination in the special drawing related lottery process by the main control unit 300 is the third. The determination result (for example, the stop symbol is special figure B or special figure b), and the 15R normal big hit game which is the first big hit of the first gaming state by the special figure state update process by the main control unit 300 is obtained. The executed 15R jackpot gaming state (also referred to as 15R jackpot state) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the 15R big hit game state, based on the control by the first sub-control unit 400, the big hit start effect is executed in the period from the start of the game to the start of the first round (1R round) attacker release. The effect for changing the effect during the big hit is executed in a period including the opening / closing of the attacker in the first round and the opening / closing of the attacker in the second round. An effect change by the player is permitted during the effect for changing the effect during the big hit. In this way, a period in which the production can be changed starts from the start of 1R, and during this period, the production display means (for example, a song selection production) can be performed with the production display means. . Next, from the closing of the attacker in the second round to the closing of the attacker in the fifteenth round, the big hit effect related to the production change is executed and the production change by the player is impossible. In this way, after the big hit production changeable period ends, the production execution period during which the changed production can be executed is entered. The big hit end effect is executed during the period from the 15th round of closing the attacker to the end of the game.
In this embodiment, the opening time of the attacker 234 in the 15R big hit game is fixed (29 seconds in this embodiment). However, a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of incoming balls are released during the opening of the attacker 234. In some cases, the attacker 234 closes in less than 29 seconds.

  FIG. 28 shows a 15R jackpot effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 1 according to the present embodiment. 28A to 28H show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. FIG. 28 (a) shows that the main control unit 300 has a 15R big hit (for example, a normal big hit), and the first sub-control unit as an effect control means based on a winning effect start command from the main control unit 300. 400 shows a state in which “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 by controlling the ornamental symbol display device 208 as an effect means for performing a game effect.

  FIG. 28B shows a state in which the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, a state in which a samurai is facing the front and displaying a big hit character on the left side to indicate that a 15R big hit game is started is shown.

  FIGS. 28C and 28D show execution examples of effects for changing the effect during the big hit. FIG. 28C shows an effect in 1R (first round) in which the 15R big hit game is started. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and the song title as production 1, "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2, and song code as production 3. And “M3: Your Fragrance” indicating the song title are sequentially displayed from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select an effect!” Is displayed together with the image of the samurai's face.

  In this state, the effect currently selected by the player is displayed with a thick frame. FIG. 28C illustrates a state where the production 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one.

  FIG. 28D shows an effect in 2R (second round). The number of rounds is displayed as “2R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design display device 208 displays an effect selection screen similar to that shown in FIG. FIG. 28D illustrates a state where the production 2 is selected. An effect surrounded by a thick frame at the end of 2R is executed from 3R. In the case where the player does not select an effect item without pressing the chance button 136 once within a predetermined period, a predetermined effect item (for example, default song) determined in advance is forcibly selected.

  As described above, since the selection of the effect is performed by the player's operation using the chance button 136, the game willingness can be improved by increasing the effects that can be selected by the player's will. There is.

  FIG. 28E shows an effect in 3R (third round). As shown in FIG. 28 (d), when the chance button 136 is pressed on the effect selection screen in the second round and the display frame of effect 2 is in a thick frame state, effect 2 is selected and the third round is selected. A song “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the speaker 120 to the speaker 120, and an effect related to the song selected by the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed accordingly.

  FIG. 28 (f) shows the effect at 15R (15th round). The “Kiseki no Universe” production has been carried out since the third round. Thus, according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a different impression can be given to the pachinko machine 100 depending on the preference of the player. For example, if the player likes the production selection operation, the production selection operation can be performed along with the acquisition of 15R jackpot, so that the player may feel very happy and enhance the interest.

  FIG. 28G shows an execution example of the jackpot end effect described with reference to FIG. In the big hit end effect, for example, an image of a samurai appearing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and crying out “chance time entry” is displayed, and it is informed that the transition to the electric support state is made.

  FIG. 28 (h) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. The remaining power support count (displayed “99 more times”) is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom is displayed in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the big hit has the first big hit and the second big hit, and the rendering operation can be selected at the time of the first big hit. There are cases where a player can be pleased even if an unfavorable jackpot is hit when an advantageous jackpot continues. In addition, the player may be able to feel a sense of value in terms of performance. Furthermore, since the music can be changed at the time of the first big hit, which is advantageous to the player, there is a case where the effect at the first big hit can be made more gorgeous and the game motivation can be improved. In addition, the number of times the predetermined opening operation has been performed (the number of times of the second jackpot) is counted, and the music can be changed at the time of the first jackpot, so the player who has become a disadvantaged second jackpot May be remedied in terms of production. It can be said that it is a disappointing big hit disappointment prize.

  Next, Example 2 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 29 and FIG. FIG. 29 is a second example of the present embodiment and shows the effects of the 15R jackpot game displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The effect shown in FIG. 29 is determined by the player's operation during the effect changeable period in which the effect for changing the big hit effect within the period including 1R and 2R is performed with respect to the effect shown in FIG. In this case, the point that the effect for changing the effect during the big hit is ended and the effect can be switched to the changed effect. The effects shown in FIG. 29 are otherwise the same as the effects shown in FIG.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the effects of the 15R jackpot game displayed in time series on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 30A to 30H show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. FIG. 30 (a) shows that the determination result of the main control unit 300 is a 15R big hit (for example, a normal big hit), and the first sub-control unit as an effect control means based on a winning effect start command from the main control unit 300. 400 shows a state in which “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 by controlling the ornamental symbol display device 208 as an effect means for performing a game effect.

  FIG. 30B shows a state in which the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, a state in which a samurai is facing the front and displaying a big hit character on the left side to indicate that a 15R big hit game is started is shown.

  FIGS. 30C and 30D show an execution example of the effect for changing the effect during the big hit. 30 (c) and 30 (d) show effects in 1R (first round) in which the 15R big hit game is started. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and the song title as production 1, "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2, and song code as production 3. And “M3: Your Fragrance” indicating the song title are sequentially displayed from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select an effect!” Is displayed together with the image of the samurai's face.

  In this state, the effect currently selected by the player is displayed with a thick frame. FIG. 30C illustrates a state where the production 1 is selected. In this embodiment, for example, when a predetermined time elapses, effect control is performed such that the thickness of the frame surrounding each effect is shifted downward in order. When the chance button 136 is pressed when an effect desired by the player is surrounded by a thick frame, the effect surrounded by the thick frame is selected.

  FIG. 30D shows a state where the chance button 136 is pressed during 1R and the production 2 is selected. FIG. 30 (e) shows the case where the song selected by the player during the selection changeable period in 1R is confirmed, that is, immediately after that, that is, even in 1R, the song “space of miracle” from the speaker 120. And the effect related to the music selected in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed.

  When a pointer that can be moved vertically and horizontally is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a direction key for moving the pointer is provided on the pachinko machine 100, the player operates the direction key. Thus, the thick frame may be moved up and down, and the chance button (decision key) 136 may be operated to determine the selection of the effect surrounded by the thick frame. In this case as well, as in the present embodiment, when a desired effect is selected, the selected effect may be executed even if the changeable period has not ended. When the player does not operate or when the selected effect has not been determined, the effect may be executed assuming that the effect surrounded by a thick frame is selected at the end of the changeable period. .

  FIG. 30F shows the effect at 15R (15th round). From the middle of the first round, the production of “Kiseki no Universe” is being performed. Thus, according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a different impression can be given to the pachinko machine 100 depending on the preference of the player. For example, if the player likes the production selection operation, the production selection operation can be performed along with the acquisition of 15R jackpot, so that the player may feel very happy and enhance the interest.

  FIG. 30G shows an execution example of the jackpot end effect described in FIG. In the big hit end effect, for example, an image of a samurai appearing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and crying out “chance time entry” is displayed, and it is informed that the transition to the electric support state is made.

  FIG. 30 (h) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. The remaining power support count (displayed “99 more times”) is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom is displayed in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the big hit has the first big hit and the second big hit, and the rendering operation can be selected at the time of the first big hit. There are cases where a player can be pleased even if an unfavorable jackpot is hit when an advantageous jackpot continues. In addition, the player may be able to feel a sense of value in terms of performance. Furthermore, since the music can be changed at the time of the first big hit, which is advantageous to the player, there is a case where the effect at the first big hit can be made more gorgeous and the game motivation can be improved. In addition, the number of times the predetermined opening operation has been performed (the number of times of the second jackpot) is counted, and the music can be changed at the time of the first jackpot, so the player who has become a disadvantaged second jackpot May be remedied in terms of production. It can be said that it is a disappointing big hit disappointment prize.

  Next, Example 3 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 31 and FIG. FIG. 31 is a third example of the present embodiment and shows the effects of the 15R jackpot game displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In the performance shown in FIG. 31, the attacker 234 is not opened continuously, for example, for 29 seconds in the first 1R, instead of opening and closing the attacker twice as in the case of the 2R big hit game. It is characterized in that operations and effects are executed. The 15R big hit game according to this embodiment is called a jump-up bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 31, during the period from the start of the 15R jackpot game to the release of the 1R attacker, the same effect as the performance 1 shown in FIG. 24 is executed, not the jackpot start effect as shown in FIG. The Next, an effect similar to the effect 2 shown in FIG. 24 is executed in a period including the first attacker opening and closing and the second attacker opening and closing. Next, the third attacker opening is executed from the second attacker closing, and the effect 4 is executed for a predetermined period. Thus, in the present embodiment, at the first 1R start time of 15R big hit, the same effects as the small hit game and 2R big hit game are performed.

  The closing time of the attacker after the third opening of the attacker is almost the same as the closing time of the 1R attack per normal 15R big hit. The effect for changing the effect during the big hit is executed until the end time of 2R after the end of the effect 4, and the effect change by the player is permitted. From the end of 2R to the end of 15R, the selected jackpot effect is executed and the change of the effect by the player is prohibited. After the end of 15R, the big hit end effect is executed for a predetermined time. In this embodiment, the production change can be made after the production 4 (JUB promotion production) is finished, but the production change may be made after the second time the attacker is closed.

  FIG. 32 shows an effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment. FIGS. 32A to 32J show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 32A to 32C are the same as the effects in the small hit game shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32A shows a state in which “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. In addition, players familiar with the game know that when this stop symbol is displayed, it may develop into a small hit, a latent probability change (2R big hit), or a jump-up bonus (15R positive change big hit) described later. I have great expectations.

  FIG. 32B shows effect 1. In the production 1, the decoration symbol stop display “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and an image of the samurai shouting “Wait!” Is displayed in the center. It is displayed.

  FIG. 32C shows the production 2. In production 2, the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of the samurai running to the right is displayed large in the center. FIG. 32 (c-1) shows a state where the door member 234 a of the attacker 234 is opened. FIG. 32C-2 shows a state where the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is closed. During the period in which the production 2 is being executed, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 repeats the states of FIGS. 32 (c-1) and (c-2) twice. The interval at which the open / close state of the attacker 234 changes at this time is an interval at which a game ball similar to the small hit or 2R big hit cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at maximum).

  FIG. 32D shows an execution example of effect 4. For the effect 4, a large samurai is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a message “Large behaviour: 15R jackpot” is displayed to notify that the jump-up bonus has been won. As shown in FIG. 32 (de-1), the attacker 234 is opened in the middle of the production 4. In this way, in the jump-up bonus, the operation and production of the attacker 234 are the same as those of the 2R big hit game and the small hit game halfway. The attacking operations shown in FIGS. 32 (c-1) and (c-2) are 2 sets, and the attacking operation shown in FIG. 32 (de-1) is 1R.

  Next to effect 4, as shown in FIG. 32 (e), an effect for changing the effect during the big hit is executed. As shown in FIG. 32 (de-1), the number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the attacker 234 is opened (or just after it is opened). The A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and the song title as production 1, "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2, and song code as production 3. And “M3: Your Fragrance” indicating the song title are sequentially displayed from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select an effect!” Is displayed together with the image of the samurai's face.

  In this state, the effect currently selected by the player is displayed with a thick frame. FIG. 32E illustrates a state where the production 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one.

  FIG. 32 (f) shows an effect in 2R. The number of rounds is displayed as “2R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design display device 208 displays an effect selection screen similar to that shown in FIG. FIG. 32F illustrates a state where the production 2 is selected. An effect surrounded by a thick frame at the end of 2R is executed from 3R. In the case where the player does not select an effect item without pressing the chance button 136 once within a predetermined period, a predetermined effect item (for example, default song) determined in advance is forcibly selected.

  FIG. 32G shows an effect in 3R. As shown in FIG. 32 (f), when the chance button 136 is pressed on the effect selection screen in the second round and the display frame of effect 2 is in a thick frame state, effect 2 is selected and the third round is selected. A song “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the speaker 120 to the speaker 120, and an effect related to the song selected by the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed accordingly.

  FIG. 32 (h) shows an effect at 15R. The “Kiseki no Universe” production has been carried out since the third round. Thus, according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a different impression can be given to the pachinko machine 100 depending on the preference of the player. For example, if the player likes the production selection operation, the production selection operation can be performed along with the acquisition of 15R jackpot, so that the player may feel very happy and enhance the interest.

  FIG. 32 (i) shows an execution example of the jackpot end effect described in FIG. The big hit end effect is displayed, for example, by displaying an image of a samurai appearing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and screaming “probability change rush”, and informing that the transition to the probability change state is made.

  FIG. 32 (j) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. On the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters of “probability change” indicating that the state of probability change is displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the start information is acquired, performs the determination of success / failure and can perform the start control of the hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the rendering operation And a first sub-control unit 400 capable of at least controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and a main control. The unit 300 is capable of performing at least a small hit start control that is a first hit of the winning gaming state when the result of the hit determination is a small hit that is the first hit determination result. Yes, the main control unit 300, when the result of the success / failure determination is a jump-up bonus (JUB) which is the second success / failure determination result, The main control unit 300 can control the third bonus game state when the result of the determination is a 15R big hit that is the third determination result. It is possible to perform at least the start control of 15R big hit which is a hit, both the jump-up bonus and 15R big hit are more advantageous than the small hit, and the first sub-control unit 400 may It is possible to control the decoration symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 to perform the effect selected from the inside, and the first sub-control unit 400 can execute the effect selected during the 15R big hit game. The first sub-control unit 400 is characterized in that it can execute an effect selected during the jackpot game of the jump-up bonus.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since various effects can be performed, the player's interest may be improved.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an attacker 234 that can change the open / close state from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state, and the main control unit 300 changes the open / close state of the attacker 234. It is possible to control the start of the hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the attacker 234 performs the first opening / closing operation (for example, the opening / closing operation for small hits (2 The attacker 234 can perform a first opening / closing operation and a second opening / closing operation (for example, opening / closing for JUB) during the jack-up game of the jump-up bonus. (The 15R opening / closing operation after the first opening / closing operation) can be performed, and the attacker 234 does not perform the first opening / closing operation during the 15R big hit game, and the third opening / closing operation (example: If, characterized in that 15R big hit for opening and closing operations) are those capable of performing.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the jump-up bonus that performs the same operation until the small hit and midway is also a big hit that satisfies a predetermined change condition, the player's interest is improved by performing various effects. There are cases where it is possible. In some cases, it is possible to congratulate the player on the big win that is advantageous to the player, and to improve the game motivation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 can increase the number of effects included in the effect list according to the number of occurrences of the jackpot of the jump-up bonus. The part 400 is characterized in that the number of effects included in the effect list is not changed depending on the number of occurrences per small hit.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the small hits are not counted, there may be cases where other big hits can be enhanced by including a small hit that is more disadvantageous in terms of performance than other big wins in the game. is there.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute the selection of the effect during the period in which the attacker 234 performs the first opening / closing operation during the big hit game of the jump-up bonus. The first sub-control unit 400 is characterized in that it can perform the selection of effects during the period when the attacker 234 is performing the second opening / closing operation during the jackpot game of the jump-up bonus.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect can be changed when the first sub-control unit 400 finds that 15R is a big hit. Since the effect is not changed until it is recognized that 15R is a big hit, there is a case where the time for giving the player expectations can be provided and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the interval at which the open / close state of the attacker 234 changes during both the small hit game and the jump up bonus big hit game is the interval at which the game medium cannot enter (for example, the open state). It is characterized by a maximum of 1.5 seconds).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first opening / closing operation is opened / closed at an interval at which the game ball does not enter. Therefore, the opening operation of the attacker 235 makes the player think that it is a big hit disadvantageous to the player. In some cases, when the player finds that 15R is a big hit, the blessing due to the performance can be further enhanced and the game motivation can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the result of the determination is a small hit, the combination of the first decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the determination is JUB. In this case, the combination of the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the combination of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination is a combination of the same decorative symbols (for example, decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, since the combination of the small hit and the stop pattern of the decorative pattern of JUB is the same, the player does not know which hit, and expects the player during the hit. You may be able to continue.

  Next, Example 4 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 33 and FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, the effects of the 15R big hit game displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 4 according to the present embodiment. The 15R big hit game according to this embodiment is a so-called step-up bonus. As shown in FIG. 33, the big hit start effect is executed from the start of the 15R big hit game to the start of 1R. From the start of 1R to the end of 4R, the big hit effect by the effect α is executed. From the end of 4R to immediately before the start of 5R, a big hit effect by effect β is executed. From the jackpot start effect to the end of the effect β, the player cannot change the effect selection. Next, from the start to the end of 5R (that is, during 5R), the effect for changing the effect that is a big hit is executed, and at the same time, the player can change the effect selection. From the end of 5R to the end of 15R, the big hit effect selected by the player during 5R is executed. The jackpot end effect is executed after 15R until the jackpot game ends. The player cannot change the effect selection until the end of the big hit game after the end of 5R.

  FIG. 34 shows an effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment. 34A to 34K show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. FIG. 34A shows a state where “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. Furthermore, the player who is used to the game knows that when this stop symbol is displayed, it will be a 4R big hit (usually a big win) at the worst, and further, it may develop into a step-up bonus (15R probability variable big hit). I have great expectations.

  FIG. 34B shows a big hit start effect. In the big hit start effect, for example, a samurai and a big hit character image are displayed over the entire display area.

  FIG. 34C shows the effect α. In the effect α, the number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image in which a samurai carrying a thousand boxes is running to the right is displayed large in the center. At the time of this production, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is open. This production α continues to 4R.

  FIG. 34D shows an execution example of the effect α in 4R. In the effect α, the number of rounds is displayed as “4R” in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a large image of a samurai carrying a thousand boxes running to the right is displayed. At the time of this production, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is open.

  Next to the effect α, the effect β is executed as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, a step-up bonus is shown, but the effect up to the effect α is the same as the 15R big hit (substantially 4R) described later. The effect β is executed in a period in which the attacker 234 is not opened after the predetermined number of rounds (4R in this case) is finished (after the attacker is closed). The effect of whether or not to be promoted to 15R by the effect β is performed. In the production β shown in FIG. 34 (e), an effect is performed in which a samurai who has carried a thousand boxes is throwing a thousand boxes toward the villagers.

  In the second half of the subsequent production β, as shown in FIG. 34 (f), the Thousand Boxes thrown out by the samurai are successfully received by the villagers and the characters “Success!” Are displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the step-up bonus has been obtained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the effect for changing the effect during the big hit is executed. Immediately after the 5R-th attacker 234 is opened, the round number is displayed as “5R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and the song title as production 1, "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2, and song code as production 3. And “M3: Your Fragrance” indicating the song title are sequentially displayed from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select an effect!” Is displayed together with the image of the samurai's face.

  In this state, the effect currently selected by the player is displayed with a thick frame. FIG. 34 (g) illustrates a state where production 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one.

  FIG. 34 (h) shows an effect at 6R. The number of rounds is displayed as “6R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 34 (h), production 2 is selected, and in the sixth round, the music of “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the speaker 120, and the production related to the music selected on the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed accordingly. Yes.

  FIG. 34 (i) shows an effect at 15R. The “Kiseki no Universe” production has been performed since the sixth round. Thus, according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a different impression can be given to the pachinko machine 100 depending on the preference of the player. For example, if the player likes the production selection operation, the production selection operation can be performed along with the acquisition of 15R jackpot, so that the player may feel very happy and enhance the interest.

  FIG. 34J shows an execution example of the jackpot end effect described in FIG. The big hit end effect is displayed, for example, by displaying an image of a samurai appearing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and screaming “probability change rush”, and informing that the transition to the probability change state is made.

  FIG. 34 (k) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. On the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters of “probability change” indicating that the state of probability change is displayed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to select an effect operation in the step-up bonus jackpot game. Since it is possible to select an effect, the player may be able to feel that he has won a 15R jackpot instead of a substantial 4R jackpot which will be described later. In addition, the player may be able to feel a sense of value in terms of performance. Further, since the effect can be changed at the time of 15R big hit, which is advantageous for the player, the effect at the time of 15R big hit may be made more gorgeous and the game motivation may be improved.

  Next, Example 5 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 35 and FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a 15R jackpot game effect in time series displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 5 according to the present embodiment. The 15R jackpot game according to this embodiment is a so-called substantial 4R jackpot. In actual 4R big hit, the opening time of the attacker 234 at 1R to 4R is the same as that of the 15R normal big hit, but from 5R to 15R, the opening time of the attacker 234 is short (for example, the maximum open state of the attacker per round is 1.5 seconds) ) Since game balls do not enter much, it is a big hit that is substantially the same as the 4R big hit. As shown in FIG. 35, the jackpot start effect is executed from the start of the 15R jackpot game until the start of 1R. From the start of 1R to the end of 4R, the big hit effect by the effect α is executed. Up to this point, it is the same as the step-up bonus. An effect γ different from the effect β with the step-up bonus is executed from the end of 4R to immediately before the start of 5R. Next, 5R starts, but the opening time of the attacker 234 is almost the same as the 2R big hit or small hit, and the time interval during which the game ball cannot enter the attacker 234 (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum). . Subsequently, the opening time of the attacker 234 for 6R to 15R is also executed at a time interval during which the game ball cannot enter the attacker 234. From the start of 5R to the end of 15R, a substantial 4R big hit effect is executed. The jackpot end effect is executed after 15R until the jackpot game ends. The effect for changing the effect during the big hit is not executed in the entire period from the start to the end of the big hit game, and therefore the player cannot change the selection of the effect in the entire period.

  FIG. 36 shows an effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment. 36A to 36H show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. FIG. 36A shows a state in which “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. Furthermore, the player who is used to the game knows that when this stop symbol is displayed, it will be a 4R big hit (usually a big win) at the worst, and further, it may develop into a step-up bonus (15R probability variable big hit). I have great expectations.

  FIG. 36B shows a big hit start effect. In the big hit start effect, for example, a samurai and a big hit character image are displayed over the entire display area.

  FIG. 36C shows the effect α. In the effect α, the number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image in which a samurai carrying a thousand boxes is running to the right is displayed large in the center. At the time of this production, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is open. This production α continues to 4R.

  FIG. 36D shows an execution example of the effect α in 4R. In the effect α, the number of rounds is displayed as “4R” in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a large image of a samurai carrying a thousand boxes running to the right is displayed. At the time of this production, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is open.

  Next to the effect α, the effect γ is executed as shown in FIG. The effect γ is executed in a period in which the attacker 234 is not opened after the predetermined number of rounds (4R in this case) is finished (after the attacker is closed). The effect of whether to be promoted to 15R by effect γ is performed. In the effect γ shown in FIG. 36 (e), an effect is performed in which the samurai who carried the thousand-thousand box is about to throw the thousand-thousand box toward the villagers.

  In the second half of the subsequent production γ, as shown in FIG. 3 f (f), the Senjo box thrown out by the samurai does not reach the villagers and the samurai is nodded and the words “failure ...” are displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the step-up bonus was not obtained.

  FIG. 36 (g) shows an execution example of a substantial 4R big hit effect. In the real 4R big hit effect, the samurai thrown out by the samurai box does not reach the villagers, and the characters “Let's do our best ...” are displayed. FIG. 36 (g-1) shows a state where the door member 234 a of the attacker 234 is opened. FIG. 36 (g-2) shows a state where the door member 234 a of the attacker 234 is closed. The door member 234a of the attacker 234 repeats the states of FIGS. 36 (g-1) and (g-2) 11 times during the period in which the substantial 4R big hit effect is being executed. The interval at which the open / close state of the attacker 234 changes at this time is an interval at which the game ball cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum). For this reason, the actual 4R jackpot is a 15R jackpot game, but the number of balls played is almost the same as the 4R jackpot.

  FIG. 36 (h) shows an execution example of the jackpot end effect. In the big hit end effect, for example, an image of a samurai appearing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and crying out “chance time entry” is displayed, and it is informed that the transition to the electric support state is made.

  Next, Example 6 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating operations of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Since the configuration of the vertical axis in FIG. 37 is the same as that in FIG. 23, detailed description thereof is omitted. FIG. 37 shows a state in which the game continues in the order of small hit, 2R big hit (sudden probability change), 15R big hit, 15R big hit, 2R big hit (sudden probability change), and 15R big hit. In this case, when the 2R big hit is not sandwiched between the 15R big hit and the next 15R big hit, the count value K of the music increase counter is maintained. In addition, when 2R big hit (sudden probability change) is won in the short time (after the second 15R big hit in the figure), 1 is added to the maintained count value K (that is, it becomes 2).

  Next, Example 7 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Since the configuration of the vertical axis in FIG. 38 is the same as that in FIG. 23, detailed description thereof is omitted. FIG. 38 shows a state in which the hit game continues in the order of small hit, 2R big hit (sudden probability change), small hit, 15R big hit, 2R big hit (latency probability change). In this case, the small hit in the non-electric support (the small hit on the left side of the figure) is maintained without increasing the count value K of the music increase counter, but the small hit in the electric support (2R big hit (sudden probability change suddenly) After 1), 1 is added to the count value K of the music increase counter. In addition, 1R is added to the count value K of the music increase counter for the 2R big hit (suddenly probable change) in which the second game state after the hit game becomes the electric support state. In the 2R big hit (latency probability change) in which the gaming state does not become the electric support state, the count value K of the music increase counter is maintained without being increased.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the second gaming state is the time-short state or the electric support state (sometimes abbreviated as the time-short state or the electric support state) in which the success / failure determination condition is easily established. Features. According to the present embodiment, the second game state is set to the electric support state, and the 2R big hit (latency probability change) that does not become the second support state becomes the electric support state. There are cases where the 2R big hit that becomes a state can be made advantageous in terms of production. Since the player is most pleased with the jackpot that is in the electric support state, there are cases where the player can be more attractive in terms of performance.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the number of effects included in the effect list can be increased by the number of occurrences of the small hits that become the electric support state after the winning game state ends. And According to the present embodiment, since the number of effects that can be selected increases depending on the number of small hits that become the electric support state after the hit gaming state ends, by making the small hits in the electric support advantageous in terms of the production, It may be possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Since the small hit during the electric support is not more pleasing than the small hit in the non-electric support state, there are cases where it can be saved in terms of performance.

  Next, Example 8 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating operations of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Since the configuration of the vertical axis in FIG. 39 is the same as that in FIG. 23, detailed description thereof is omitted. FIG. 39 shows a state in which a game continues in the order of 2R big hit (latency probability change), 2R big hit (sudden probability change), 15R big hit, 15R big hit, and small hit. In this case, the count value K of the music increase counter is incremented by 1 even at 15R big hit. The count value is incremented by 1, and the effect can be changed including the added amount. In addition, in the 2R jackpot, the one that satisfies the condition (in the case of the present embodiment, sudden change in probability) allows the player to change the production during the jackpot game, but the count value K of the song increase counter does not increase. I try to keep it. On the other hand, the 2R jackpot that does not hold the condition (in this example, the latent probability change) adds 1 to the count value K of the music increase counter. I can't change it. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored on the production side because the 2R big hit is different on the production side.

  FIG. 40 shows the pattern of the 2R big hit (sudden probability change) attacker release in chronological order in this example. FIG. 40 has the vertical axis items similar to those in FIG. The effect X is executed from the start of the 2R big hit game (suddenly probable change) until the 1R attacker is released. Production Y is executed from the opening of the 1R attacker to the closing operation of the 2R attacker. Production Z is executed from the 2R attacker closing to the end of the big hit game. You may make it open | release an attacker at the space | interval which a game ball can approach at the time of 2R big hit. Further, one of 1R and 2R may be set to an interval at which the game ball cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum), and the other may be set to an interval at which the other can enter.

  FIG. 41 is Example 8 according to the present embodiment and shows an effect (part 1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100. 41A to 41J show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 41 (a) to 41 (e) show effects in the 2R big hit game (latency probability change) in FIG. 40, and (f) to (j) show the 2R big hit game (latency probability change) next to the 2R big hit game (sudden probability change). The production is shown in (Probability). Since the effects related to the 2R big hit game (latency probability change) shown in FIGS. 41A to 41E are the same as the effects related to the small hit game shown in FIGS. 25A to 25E, description thereof will be omitted.

  41 (f) to 41 (j) show effects in 2R big hit (sudden probability change) in FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 41 (f) shows a state where “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. Furthermore, a player who is accustomed to the game has great expectation because he knows that there is a possibility of sudden change (2R big hit) when this stop symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 41 (g) shows an execution example of the effect X described in FIG. In the effect X, an image of a princess character (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) and a character “Chibi princess bonus” are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 41 (h) shows an execution example of the effect Y described in FIG. The effect Y is displayed as “1R” as the number of rounds in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the 1R-th attacker 234 is opened. A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and song title as production 1, and "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2 from the upper left of the display area It is displayed sequentially toward the lower right. Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select BGM” is displayed along with the image of the princess.

  As described above, it is possible to select an effect for the sudden probability variation big hit among the 2R big hits, but the production is not increased. On the other hand, among the 2R big hits, the latent probability variation big hit has an increase in production but cannot select the production. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored on the production side because the 2R big hit is different on the production side. Although it is possible to select an effect for the latent probability variation jackpot, it is of course possible that the effect is not increased, and that the sudden probability variation jackpot has an effect on increase but cannot be selected.

  In this state, the effect currently selected by the player is displayed with a thick frame. FIG. 41 (h) illustrates a state where the production 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one.

  FIG. 41 (i) shows an effect in 2R. The number of rounds is displayed as “2R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design display device 208 displays an effect selection screen similar to that shown in FIG. FIG. 41 (i) illustrates a state where the production 2 is selected. In the case where the player does not select an effect item without pressing the chance button 136 once within a predetermined period, a predetermined effect item (for example, default song) determined in advance is forcibly selected.

  FIG. 41 (j) shows an execution example of the effect Z described in FIG. In the effect Z, the image of the princess and the characters “super princess mode entry” are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an effect (part 2) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. 42A to 42J show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. FIG. 42A illustrates an effect executed during a special figure variable game after 2R big hit (sudden probability change). In the present embodiment, the stage 2 selected by the player in FIG. 41 (i) is executed, and the song “Kiseki no Universe” flows from the speaker 120 and is associated with the song selected on the decorative symbol display device 208 accordingly. The production to be performed is executed. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the selected BGM flows during the fluctuation (in the super / princess mode). In this example, only the BGM is changed, and the changing image (moving image) is the same. However, the mode may be changed according to the selected BGM. Here, changing the mode only changes the image (moving image) that is changing.

  42B to 42H show the 15R jackpot effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment. FIG. 42B shows that the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the main control unit 300 is a 15R big hit (for example, a probable big hit), and the first sub-control unit as an effect control unit based on a winning effect start command from the main control unit 300. 400 shows a state in which “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 by controlling the ornamental symbol display device 208 as an effect means for performing an effect of the game.

  FIG. 42 (c) shows a state in which the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, a state is shown in which a character “probability big hit” is displayed large on the left side where the samurai is standing facing the front to notify the start of the 15R special big hit game.

  FIGS. 42D and 42E show execution examples of effects for changing the effect during the big hit. FIG.42 (d) has shown the effect in 1R where 15R big hit game was started. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and the song title as production 1, "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2, and song code as production 3. And “M3: Your Fragrance” indicating the song title are sequentially displayed from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select an effect!” Is displayed together with the image of the samurai's face. In this embodiment, 1 is added to the count value K of the song increase counter even at 15R big hit, and K = 3, so that the effect 3 is also displayed in the effect list.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the count value K of the music increase counter is increased even when 15R is a big hit. At the time of 15R big hit, if the predetermined change condition is satisfied and the count value K of the music increase counter is increased, there are cases where the playable interests can be further improved because the number of effects that can be selected at 15R big hit increases. . In some cases, the 15R jackpot can be made more advantageous in terms of performance and game motivation can be improved.

  In this state, the effect currently selected by the player is displayed with a thick frame. FIG. 42D illustrates a state where the production 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one.

  FIG. 42 (e) shows an effect in 2R. The number of rounds is displayed as “2R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design display device 208 displays an effect selection screen similar to that shown in FIG. FIG. 42E illustrates a state where the production 3 is selected. An effect surrounded by a thick frame at the end of 2R is executed from 3R. In the case where the player does not select an effect item without pressing the chance button 136 once within a predetermined period, a predetermined effect item (for example, default song) determined in advance is forcibly selected.

  FIG.42 (f) has shown the effect in 3R. As shown in FIG. 42E, when the chance button 136 is pressed on the effect selection screen in the second round and the display frame of the effect 3 is in a thick frame state, the effect 3 is selected and the third round is selected. A song “Your Fragrance” flows from the speaker 120 and an effect related to the song selected on the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed accordingly.

  FIG. 42 (g) shows the effect at 15R. The production of “Your Fragrance” has been performed since the third round. Thus, according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a different impression can be given to the pachinko machine 100 depending on the preference of the player. For example, if the player likes the production selection operation, the production selection operation can be performed along with the acquisition of 15R jackpot, so that the player may feel very happy and enhance the interest.

  FIG. 42 (h) shows an execution example of the jackpot end effect. The big hit end effect is displayed, for example, by displaying an image of a samurai appearing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and screaming “probability change rush”, and informing that the transition to the probability change state is made.

  FIG. 42 (i) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. “Probability change” is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom is displayed in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas.

  FIG. 42 (j) shows that the main control unit 300 determines whether or not it is a 15R big hit (for example, a normal big hit), and the first sub-control unit as the production control means based on the winning production start command from the main control unit 300. 400 shows a state in which “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 by controlling the ornamental symbol display device 208 as an effect means for performing a game effect.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an effect (No. 3) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 8 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43A shows a state in which the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, a state in which a samurai is facing the front and displaying a big hit character on the left side to indicate that a 15R big hit game is started is shown.

  FIGS. 43B and 43C show execution examples of effects for changing the effect during the big hit. FIG.43 (b) has shown the production in 1R where 15R big hit game was started. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and the song title as production 1, "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2, and song code as production 3. And “M3: Kimi no Kakera” indicating the song title and “M4: Mega! Giga! Summer!” Indicating the song code and song title as production 4 are displayed in order from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. . Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select an effect!” Is displayed together with the image of the samurai's face. In this embodiment, 1 is added to the count value K of the song increase counter even at 15R big hit, and K = 4, so that the effect 4 can also be selected in the effect list. Note that the display of effect 4 is hidden in FIG. 43B due to the size of the display area.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the count value K of the music increase counter is increased even when 15R is a big hit. At the time of 15R big hit, if the predetermined change condition is satisfied and the count value K of the music increase counter is increased, there are cases where the playable interests can be further improved because the number of effects that can be selected at 15R big hit increases. . In some cases, the 15R jackpot can be made more advantageous in terms of performance and game motivation can be improved.

  In this state, the effect currently selected by the player is displayed with a thick frame. FIG. 43B illustrates a state where the production 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows an effect in 2R. The number of rounds is displayed as “2R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design display device 208 has an effect selection screen similar to that shown in FIG. 43 (b), but the screen is scrolled upward and effects 3, effects 4, and effects 1 are displayed in order from the top. FIG. 43C illustrates a state where the production 4 is selected. An effect surrounded by a thick frame at the end of 2R is executed from 3R. In the case where the player does not select an effect item without pressing the chance button 136 once within a predetermined period, a predetermined effect item (for example, default song) determined in advance is forcibly selected.

  FIG. 43D shows an effect in 3R. As shown in FIG. 43 (c), when the chance button 136 is pressed on the effect selection screen in the second round and the display frame of the effect 4 is in a thick frame state, the effect 4 is selected and the third round is selected. A song “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Flows from the speaker 120 and an effect related to the song selected on the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed accordingly.

  FIG. 43E shows an effect at 15R. From the third round, the production of “Mega! Giga! Summer!” Has been carried out. Thus, according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a different impression can be given to the pachinko machine 100 depending on the preference of the player. For example, if the player likes the production selection operation, the production selection operation can be performed along with the acquisition of 15R jackpot, so that the player may feel very happy and enhance the interest.

  FIG. 43 (f) shows an execution example of the jackpot end effect. In the big hit end effect, for example, an image of a samurai appearing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and crying out “chance time entry” is displayed, and it is informed that the transition to the electric support state is made.

  FIG. 43 (g) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. The remaining power support count (displayed “99 more times”) is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom is displayed in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas.

  In this way, the selected BGM flows during the fluctuation (in the super / princess mode). In the case of the present embodiment, only the BGM may be changed and the changing image (moving image) may be the same, or the mode may be changed according to the selected BGM and the image (moving image) may be changed according to the selected BGM. You may make it let. The image (moving image) may be the same and only BGM may be changed. The image (moving image) may be selected, and the BGM may be changed according to the image (moving image). The BGM may be the same and only the image (moving image) may be replaced.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an effect (part 4) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth example of the present embodiment. 44A to 44F show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 44 (a) to 44 (e) show effects in the small hit game in FIG.

FIG. 44A shows a state in which “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. In addition, players familiar with the game know that when this stop symbol is displayed, it may develop into a small hit, a latent probability change (2R big hit), or a jump-up bonus (15R positive change big hit) described later. I have great expectations.
Note that “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” may be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 even in the case of sudden change in probability (2R big hit).

  FIG. 44 (b) shows an example of a small hit game effect. As for the production, the stop display “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” of the ornamental symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and “If you put the pattern on the screen, you will be surely entered!” ing.

  In FIG. 44 (c), the decorative symbol stop display is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of the samurai holding a golf putter is displayed large in the center. FIG. 44 (c-1) shows a state where the door member 234 a of the attacker 234 is opened. FIG. 44 (c-2) shows a state where the door member 234 a of the attacker 234 is closed. During the period in which the effect is being executed, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 repeats the states of FIGS. 44 (c-1) and (c-2) twice. The interval at which the open / close state of the attacker 234 changes at this time is an interval at which the game ball cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum).

  FIG. 44D shows a state in which the ball has deviated from the cup and stopped as a result of the putter. In FIG. 44 (e), “continuation of chance time” is displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 44 (f) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. In the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the number of remaining electric supports is 65. In the center of the display area, the decorations 0 to 9 are placed in the middle left and right decorative symbol display areas from top to bottom. Images that move sequentially are displayed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the small hit effect is performed while the attacker is opening and closing. In addition, when it is a small hit during time reduction or probable change, the effect of misalignment is performed. The small hits during normal times and during the change of the latent probability are performed in such a way that the hit or miss is not known. It should be noted that it is possible to perform an effect such that the winning or losing is not recognized even during time reduction or probability change.

  Next, Example 9 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an effect (part 1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth example of the present embodiment. This embodiment is characterized in that an effect list is used for prefetching effects. 45A to 45I show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 45A shows a state in which the off symbol “decoration 0-decoration 6-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed on the ornament symbol display device 208. Further, for example, there are three special figure 1 holds, and the third hold is displayed in a manner different from the first and second hold, and the prefetch notification is performed. Note that the hold display (the third hold in FIG. 45A) to be prefetched may have the same display mode as the other hold displays (the first and second hold in FIG. 45A).

  FIG. 45 (b) shows a state in which the first hold is digested and a special figure variation game based on the hold is started. The decorative symbol variation display (indicated by three downward arrows) is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a look-ahead effect in which the samurai screams "next!" . There are two special figure 1 holds, and the second hold is displayed in a mode different from the first hold, and the prefetch notification is performed.

  FIG. 45 (c) shows a state in which the off symbol “decoration 1-decoration 7-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45 (d) shows a state in which the second hold is digested and a special figure variation game based on the hold is started. In the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced, and a pre-reading effect in which the warrior screams “next!” Is executed in the center. There is one special figure 1 hold.

  FIG. 45 (e) shows a state in which the special figure variation game in FIG. 45 (d) continues. An effect for selecting an effect based on the effect list is performed as an effect of notifying that the next variation is suddenly probable, as the decorative symbol variation display is reduced in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the pre-reading effect of music selection is performed as a final announcement of 2R jackpot with a short time to listen to music. With the pre-read notification by this effect selection, the player can select a desired effect while expecting future development. In this example, it is assumed that production 1 is selected. In addition, you may perform as a prefetch effect of another big hit (15R system).

  FIG. 45 (f) shows a state in which the off symbol “decoration 7—decoration 5—decoration 1” is stopped and displayed on the ornament symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45 (g) shows a state in which the third suspension is initially digested and a special figure variation game based on the suspension is started. A variation display of the decorative symbols is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a pre-reading effect in which the samurai is screaming “hot!” Is executed in the center. Special figure 1 hold is 0.

  FIG. 45 (h) shows the state of "decoration 1-arrow-decoration 5" on the ornament symbol display device 208, the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas, and the ornament symbol in the middle symbol display area is still rotating. Indicates that no stop display has been made.

  FIG. 45 (i) shows a state where the 2R big hit (suddenly probable) symbol “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. Furthermore, a player who is accustomed to the game has great expectation because he knows that there is a possibility of sudden change (2R big hit) when this stop symbol is displayed.

  46 (a) to 46 (e) show effects in 2R big hit (sudden probability change). FIG. 46A shows an execution example of the big hit start effect. A princess is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and characters “Chibi princess bonus” are displayed beside it.

  In FIG. 46 (b), “1R” indicating that it is the first round is reduced and displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. From the first round, the speaker 120 may indicate that “it may be there. The music related to the music selected by the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in accordance with the music “.

  FIG.46 (c) has shown 2R production. From the first round, the production “May be there ...” is being performed. Thus, according to the present embodiment, there may be a case where a different impression can be given to the pachinko machine 100 depending on the preference of the player. For example, if the player prefers a production selection operation, the production selection operation can be performed as a 2R jackpot look-ahead production, so that the player may feel very happy and enhance the entertainment.

  FIG. 46D shows an execution example of the big hit end effect. The big hit end effect is displayed, for example, by displaying an image of a samurai appearing in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and screaming “probability change rush”, and informing that the transition to the probability change state is made.

  FIG. 46E shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. “Probability change” indicating the remaining probability change state is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area, an image in which decoration 0 to decoration 9 sequentially moves from top to bottom is displayed in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect selected in the prefetch effect is made to flow during the big hit game. The image (video) is fixed (for the Chibi princess bonus), so that only the song can be changed. Note that the effect (including images (moving images)) during the big hit may be changed depending on the selected effect. In addition, the selected effects and music may be continuously played after the big hit.

  Next, Example 10 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 10 according to the present embodiment. 47A to 47H show display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  47 (a) to (h) show effects in 2R big hit (sudden probability change). FIG. 47A shows a state where “decoration 1—decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Even for a player who is not familiar with the game of the pachinko machine 100, this stop symbol display gives a sense of expectation that the game state may shift to an advantageous game state. Furthermore, a player who is accustomed to the game has great expectation because he knows that there is a possibility of sudden change (2R big hit) when this stop symbol is displayed.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 47B, the stop display “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” of the ornamental symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the warrior “goes! ”Is displayed.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 47 (c), the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of the samurai carrying a thousand boxes and running toward the right is displayed large in the center. Has been. FIG. 47 (cd-1) shows a state where the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is opened. FIG. 47 (cd-2) shows a state where the door member 234a of the attacker 234 is closed. During the period in which the effects shown in FIGS. 47C to 47D are being executed, the door member 234a of the attacker 234 repeats the states of FIGS. 25C-1 and 25C 2R. The interval at which the opening / closing state of the attacker 234 changes at this time is the same as the interval at which the opening / closing state of the attacker 234 changes at, for example, the small hit or 2R big hit (latency probability change), and the interval at which the game ball cannot enter (for example, open The state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum.

  In the present embodiment, since 1 is added to the count value K of the song increase counter at 2R big hit, an effect is added to the effect list. In the effect shown in FIG. 47 (d), an image in which the samurai screams “Song GET !!” is displayed in the center, and ““ Getting the universe of Kiseki ”is displayed below. In this case, the fact that the effect was added during the effect of the big hit game is notified, but this is not a limitation, and it can be notified at any timing. Of course, you may be notified.

  47 (e) is an execution example of the display in which a decorative symbol stop display is reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. “Inrush” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (f) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. A display indicating the super general mode is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the display area, the decorations 0 to 9 sequentially move from top to bottom in each of the left middle right decorative symbol display areas. An image is displayed.

  Even a player who is not accustomed to the game of the pachinko machine 100 has a sense of expectation that the game state in the super general mode may shift to a game state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, since the player who is accustomed to the game knows that the super general mode is suddenly in a probable state, he can enjoy the game greatly by knowing that there is a high possibility of 15R jackpot.

  FIG. 47 (g) shows that the result of the main control unit 300 is a 15R big hit (for example, a normal big hit), and the first sub-control unit as an effect control unit based on a winning effect start command from the main control unit 300. 400 shows a state in which “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 by controlling the ornamental symbol display device 208 as an effect means for performing a game effect.

  FIG. 47 (h) is an execution example of the effect for changing the effect during the big hit, and shows the effect at 1R where the 15R big hit game is started. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. For example, "M1: May be there ..." indicating the song code and song title as production 1, and "M2: Space of miracle" showing the song code and song title as production 2 from the upper left of the display area It is displayed sequentially toward the lower right. Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select an effect!” Is displayed together with the image of the samurai's face.

  Next, Example 11 of the rendering operation by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 in Example 11 according to the present embodiment. 48A to 48E show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. FIG. 48A shows that the main control unit 300 determines whether or not it is a 15R big hit (for example, a normal big hit), and a first sub-control unit as an effect control means based on a winning effect start command from the main control unit 300. 400 shows a state in which “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 by controlling the ornamental symbol display device 208 as an effect means for performing a game effect.

  FIG. 48B shows a state in which the big hit start effect is executed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, a state in which a samurai is facing the front and displaying a big hit character on the left side to indicate that a 15R big hit game is started is shown.

  48C and 48D show execution examples of effects for changing the effect during the big hit. FIG.48 (c) has shown the effect in 1R where 15R big hit game was started. The number of rounds is displayed as “1R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect data stored in the effect list is displayed. In this embodiment, instead of the music data, a display image (moving image) to be displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected. For example, “C1: Yoshimune Round” indicating an image code and an image title as effect 1, “C2: Sakai Round” indicating an image code and an image title as effect 2, and “C3: "Princess Round" is displayed sequentially from the upper left to the lower right of the display area. Furthermore, a message “Press the button to select an effect!” Is displayed together with the image of the samurai's face.

  In this state, the effect currently selected by the player is displayed with a thick frame. FIG. 48C illustrates a state where the production 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed once, the selected effect frame is shifted downward by one.

  FIG. 48D shows an effect in 2R. The number of rounds is displayed as “2R” in the upper right area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative design display device 208 displays an effect selection screen similar to that shown in FIG. FIG. 48D illustrates a state where the production 2 is selected. An effect surrounded by a thick frame at the end of 2R is executed from 3R. In the case where the player does not select an effect item without pressing the chance button 136 once within a predetermined period, a predetermined effect item (for example, default song) determined in advance is forcibly selected.

  FIG. 48 (e) illustrates an effect in 3R. As shown in FIG. 48D, when the chance button 136 is pressed on the effect selection screen in the second round and the display frame of effect 2 is in a thick frame state, the effect 2 is selected and the third round is selected. The effect related to the image “Round Round” selected by the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed. FIG. 48 (e ′) illustrates an effect at 3R when effect 1 is selected on the effect selection screen shown in FIG. 48 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 48 (e ′), the effect related to the selected image “Yoshimune round” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from the third round. FIG. 48 (e ″) exemplifies the effect at 3R when effect 3 is selected on the effect selection screen shown in FIG. 48 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 48 (e ″), the effect related to the selected image “Princess Round” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from the third round. In such effects, an image (moving image) may be selected on the effect selection screen. The BGM may be different for each image (moving image) or may be the same for each image (moving image).

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 48 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
When the determination condition is satisfied (for example, when starting information is acquired), determination means for determining whether or not the determination is possible (for example, special drawing 2 related lottery processing by the main control unit 300 (step S229)) And special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231)),
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least performing the production operation;
Production control means capable of at least controlling the production means (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),
A game control means (for example, a special figure 2 state update process (step S225) by the main control unit 300) or a special control capable of performing at least start control of a first gaming state (for example, a winning gaming state) advantageous to the player. FIG. 1 state update process (step S227)),
A game machine equipped with
When the result of the success / failure determination is a first success / failure determination result (for example, a small hit), the game control means determines a first hit (for example, a small hit) of the first gaming state. It is possible to perform at least start control,
When the result of the success / failure determination is a second success / failure determination result (for example, 2R big hit), the game control means determines the second hit (for example, 2R big hit) of the first gaming state. It is possible to perform at least start control,
The second hit is a more advantageous hit than the first hit,
The game control means is capable of at least starting a second game state (for example, a game state other than a winning game, for example, a special figure high probability state),
When the production operation change condition is satisfied (for example, when start control of 15R big hit is performed), the production control unit performs the production operation selected from the production operation candidates on the production unit. Control is possible,
The second gaming state is configured not to be started at least after the end of the first hit.
The second gaming state is configured to be able to start at least after the end of the second hit,
The production control means can change at least the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates according to the number of occurrences of the second hit,
The production control means is characterized in that the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates is not changed according to the number of occurrences of the first hit.

Here, as an example of the establishment of the first hit, second hit, production action change condition,
(I) When the first hit is a small hit,
(A) If the second hit is a 2R big hit, establishment of the effect operation change condition may be when a start control of a 15R big hit (including a 15R special big hit, a 15R normal big hit, and also including JUB and SUB) is performed;
(B) If the second hit is a 2R big hit, the production operation change condition may be satisfied when the start control for the 4R big hit is performed;
(C) If the second hit is a 4R big hit or a 15R big hit (substantially 4R), the effect operation change condition may be satisfied even when the start control for the 15R big hit is performed;
(II) When the first hit is 2R big hit,
If the second hit is a 4R big hit or a 15R big hit (substantially 4R), the effect operation change condition may be satisfied when the start control for the 15R big hit is performed.
Note that the second win of the first game state may be more advantageous than the first win that starts the second game state after the end of the first game state.
Note that the gaming state before the first hit may not be the second gaming state.
Note that the second gaming state may be continued at least during the first hit.
Note that the second gaming state may be continued at least during the small hit.
In addition, when the start control of 15R big hit (substantially 4R) is performed, the effect operation change condition may be satisfied.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, there are cases in which the player's interest can be improved because various effects can be performed.

(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
Variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234) capable of changing at least the open / closed state from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state;
The game control means is capable of at least performing start control of the first game state that is advantageous to a player by changing the open / closed state of the variable winning means.
The first hit is a small hit and the second hit is a big hit.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the number of performance operations that can be selected can be changed according to the number of occurrences of jackpots that become the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state, and after the end of the first gaming state, In the small hits that are not in the second gaming state, the number of presentation operations that can be selected can be prevented from changing. Thereby, a player's interest can be improved by performing various productions. Further, by not counting the small hits where the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there are cases where the second big hit, which is disadvantageous for the player, can be further enhanced in terms of performance. Furthermore, since a small hit where the predetermined condition is not satisfied can be treated as at least a second jackpot (gase) where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the player may be expected.

(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The game control means, when the result of the success / failure determination is a third success / failure determination result (for example, 15R big hit), the first big hit (for example, 15R big hit, jump up) of the first gaming state Bonus, step-up bonus, 4R big hit) can be started at least,
The game control means, when the result of the success / failure determination is the second success / failure determination result (for example, 2R big hit, 15R big hit (substantially 4R), 4R big hit), It is possible to perform at least start control of a second jackpot (for example, 2R jackpot, 15R jackpot (substantially 4R), 4R jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first jackpot,
The maximum number of times that the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the second big win (for example, the number of rounds) is the same as the maximum number of times that the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the small hit. Yes,
When the first jackpot start control is performed at least, the effect operation change condition is satisfied,
The effect control means may change at least the number of effect actions included in the effect action candidates according to the number of occurrences of the second jackpot that becomes the second game state after the end of the first game state. It is possible.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the big hit has a first big hit and a second big hit, and it is possible to select an effect operation when the first big hit. Since the number of presentation actions that can be selected increases with the occurrence of the second jackpot, there may be a case where the player can be pleased even if an unfavorable jackpot is hit, for example, when an advantageous jackpot continues. In addition, the player may be able to feel a sense of value in terms of performance. Furthermore, since the presentation can be changed at the time of the first big hit, which is advantageous to the player, there are cases where the presentation at the first big hit is made more gorgeous and the game motivation can be improved. In addition, since the number of times of the second jackpot is counted and the performance can be changed at the time of the first jackpot, there is a case where a player who has become a disadvantaged second jackpot can be rescued in terms of performance. is there. It can be said that it is a disappointing big hit disappointment prize.

(4) In the pachinko machine 100, the second gaming state is a time-short state (for example, a normal high probability state) in which the success / failure determination condition is easily established. According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, the second big hit that becomes the electric support state by making the second game state the electric support state, and the second big hit that does not become the electric support state is also disadvantageous in terms of performance. May be advantageous in terms of production. Since the player is most pleased with the jackpot that is in the electric support state, there are cases where the player can be more attractive in terms of performance.

(5) In the pachinko machine 100, the effect control means includes the effect operation included in the effect operation candidates according to the number of occurrences of the small hits that become the second game state after the end of the first game state. It is characterized in that the number can be changed at least. According to the pachinko machine 100, since the number of presentation operations that can be selected changes depending on the number of small hits that become the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state, In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the player from getting bored. Since the small hits during the electric support are less happy than the non-electric support small hits, there are cases where it can be saved in terms of performance.

(6) In the pachinko machine 100,
A symbol display means (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display;
Design control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of controlling at least the design display means,
Of the symbol display means, the first symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) enters the special symbol 1 starting port 230 when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212). Case), the symbol variation display can be executed,
Of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214) enters the special symbol 2 start port 232 when the second symbol variation condition is established (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214). Case), the symbol variation display can be executed,
The symbol control means can suspend the start of symbol variation display by the first symbol display means when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display (for example, four). And
The symbol control means can suspend the start of symbol variation display by the second symbol display means when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display (for example, four). And
The symbol control means displays the symbol fluctuation display by the first symbol display means when the symbol fluctuation display is suspended for both of the symbol display means when the symbol fluctuation display is newly started. It is configured to preferentially start the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means (for example, special figure 2 priority variation machine),
The first success / failure determination result (for example, small hit) when the symbol variation display is performed can be selected with a first probability when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied,
The first success / failure determination result when the symbol variation display is performed can be selected with a second probability lower than the first probability when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. And

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the special figure 2 priority variation and the special hit probability of the special figure 2 is lower than that of the special figure 1, so a penalty (prone to a small hit is easily given to a player who is not playing a game correctly during the electric support. ) May be encouraged to play correctly. Further, since the small hit probability of special figure 2 is low, the small hit in the electric support is often a fluctuation of special figure 1. Therefore, by changing the music that can be changed when a predetermined change condition is satisfied, it is possible to indirectly inform the player that the player has not entered the second starting area so as to suppress gambling. There are cases where it is possible.

(7) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
When the determination condition is satisfied (for example, when starting information is acquired), determination means for determining whether or not the determination is possible (for example, special drawing 2 related lottery processing by the main control unit 300 (step S229)) And special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231)),
A symbol display means (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display;
A symbol control means (for example, main controller 300) capable of controlling at least the symbol display means;
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least performing the production operation;
Production control means capable of at least controlling the production means (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),
Variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234) capable of changing at least the open / closed state from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state;
Game control means (e.g., main control unit) capable of at least starting control of a first game state (e.g., winning game state) that is advantageous to the player by changing the open / close state of the variable winning means 300 special figure 2 state update process (step S225) and special figure 1 state update process (step S227)),
A game machine equipped with
Of the symbol display means, the first symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) enters the special symbol 1 starting port 230 when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212). Case), the symbol variation display can be executed.
Of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214) enters the special symbol 2 start port 232 when the second symbol variation condition is established (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214). Case), the symbol variation display can be executed.
The symbol control means can suspend the start of symbol variation display by the first symbol display means when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display (for example, four). And
The symbol control means can suspend the start of symbol variation display by the second symbol display means when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display (for example, four). And
The symbol control means displays the symbol fluctuation display by the first symbol display means when the symbol fluctuation display is suspended for both of the symbol display means when the symbol fluctuation display is newly started. It is configured to preferentially start the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means (for example, special figure 2 priority variation machine),
The game control means can perform at least a start control of a small hit in the first gaming state when the result of the determination of the success / failure is a first determination result of the success / failure (for example, a small hit). Is,
The game control means is capable of performing at least a big hit start control in the first gaming state when the result of the success / failure determination is a second success / failure determination result (for example, 2R big hit). And
When the production operation change condition is satisfied (for example, when start control of 15R big hit is performed), the production control unit performs the production operation selected from the production operation candidates on the production unit. Control is possible,
The production control means can change at least the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates according to the number of occurrences of the jackpot,
The production control means is characterized in that the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates is not changed by the number of occurrences of the small hits.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the number of effect operations that can be selected can be changed according to the number of big hits with the special figure 2 priority variation, and the number of effect operations that can be selected with a small hit is not changed. Therefore, there are cases where various effects can be performed and the interest of the player can be improved. By not counting the small hits for which the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there are cases where the second big hit, which is disadvantageous for the player, can be further enhanced in terms of performance. Further, since a small hit where a predetermined condition is not satisfied can be treated as at least a second big hit (gase) where the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is a case where the player can be expected.

(8) In the pachinko machine 100,
The first success / failure determination result when the symbol variation display is performed can be selected with a first probability when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied,
The first success / failure determination result when the symbol variation display is performed can be selected with a second probability lower than the first probability when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. And

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the special hit probability of the special figure 2 is lower than that of the special figure 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1 by reducing the disadvantageous bonus hit in the special figure 2. In some cases, it can make things stand out and improve the fun of gaming.

(9) In the pachinko machine 100,
The game control means starts the first big hit (for example, 15R big hit) in the first gaming state when the result of the right / no-go decision is a third result (for example, 15R big hit). Control is possible at least,
The game control means is more disadvantageous to the player than the first jackpot in the first gaming state when the result of the judgment is the second hit judgment result (for example, 2R big hit). And at least start control of a second big hit (for example, 2R big hit),
The game control means is capable of at least starting a second game state (for example, a short time state),
The maximum number of times the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the second big win is the same as the maximum number of times that the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the small hit,
When the first jackpot start control is performed at least, the effect operation change condition is satisfied,
The effect control means may change at least the number of effect actions included in the effect action candidates according to the number of occurrences of the second jackpot that becomes the second game state after the end of the first game state. It is possible.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the jackpot has a first jackpot and a second jackpot, and can be selected at the time of the first jackpot. Therefore, the presentation is changed when the first jackpot is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible, there is a case where the effect at the time of the first big hit can be made more gorgeous and the game motivation can be improved. In addition, since the number of times of the second jackpot is counted and the performance can be changed at the time of the first jackpot, there is a case where a player who has become a disadvantaged second jackpot can be rescued in terms of performance. is there. Furthermore, there may be a case where the second big hit and the first big hit, which are advantageous in terms of production, can be emphasized by the disadvantageous small hit in terms of production.

(10) In the pachinko machine 100,
When the result of the success / failure determination is the first success / failure determination result (for example, a small hit), the combination of the first decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the effect display means,
When the result of the success / failure determination is the second success / failure determination result (for example, 2R big hit), the combination of the second decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the effect display means,
The combination of the first decorative symbol and the combination of the second decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed on the effect means are the same decorative symbol combination (for example, decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3). And

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the combination of the stop pattern of the second big hit and the small hit decoration symbol is the same, whether the production is changed to the small hit or the second big hit due to establishment of a predetermined change condition. Since it can be determined by no, there are cases where the player can continue to have an expectation until a predetermined change condition is satisfied.

(11) In the pachinko machine 100, the second game state is a time-short state in which the success / failure determination condition is easily satisfied, and the effect control means is in the time-short state after the first game state is finished. The number of production operations included in the production operation candidates is not changed according to the number of occurrences of the small hits.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since it is possible to prevent the small hits during the electric support from being included in the song addition condition, it is difficult for the player to have a disadvantageous hit in terms of performance during the electric support. In some cases, the player can be prevented from having excessive expectations. In addition, by reducing the small hits in the electric support, there are cases where the game can proceed smoothly and a decrease in game motivation can be prevented.

(12) In the pachinko machine 100,
During the second big hit, the interval at which the opening / closing state of the variable winning means changes includes at least the interval during which the game medium cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum),
The interval at which the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the small hit is an interval at which the game medium cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum).

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the opening / closing operations of the second big hit and the small hitter are the same in that the game ball cannot enter, and therefore, depending on the establishment of a predetermined change condition, the small hit or the second big hit Since it can be determined whether or not the music has been changed, there is a case where the player can continue to have an expectation until a predetermined change condition is satisfied.

(13) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
When the determination condition is satisfied (for example, when starting information is acquired), determination means for determining whether or not the determination is possible (for example, special drawing 2 related lottery processing by the main control unit 300 (step S229)) And special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231)),
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least performing the production operation;
Production control means capable of at least controlling the production means (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),
A game control means (for example, a special figure 2 state update process (step S225) by the main control unit 300) or a special control capable of performing at least start control of a first gaming state (for example, a winning gaming state) advantageous to the player. FIG. 1 state update process (step S227)),
A game machine equipped with
The game control means, when the result of the success / failure determination is a first success / failure determination result (for example, a small hit), a first hit (for example, a small hit) of the first gaming state. It is possible to perform at least start control of
When the result of the success / failure determination is a second success / failure determination result (for example, a jump-up bonus (JUB)), the game control means determines a second hit (for example, the first gaming state) , Jump up bonus (JUB)) can be started at least,
The game control means, when the result of the success / failure determination is a third success / failure determination result (for example, 15R big hit), the third hit (for example, 15R big hit) of the first gaming state. It is possible to perform at least start control of
Both the second hit and the third hit are more advantageous hits than the first hit,
The production control means is capable of controlling the production means to perform the production operation selected from the production operation candidates.
The production control means is capable of executing at least the selected production operation during the third hit,
The production control means is capable of executing at least the selected production operation during the second hit.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, there are cases in which the player's interest can be improved because various effects can be performed. The production control means may be capable of controlling the production means to perform the production operation selected from the production operation candidates when the production operation change condition is satisfied.

(14) In the pachinko machine 100,
Variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234) capable of changing at least the open / closed state from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state;
The game control means is capable of performing at least start control of a first game state that is advantageous to a player by changing the open / closed state of the variable winning means.
The variable winning means is capable of performing a first opening / closing operation (for example, a small opening / closing operation (a combination of two-time release and a predetermined winning number)) during the first winning,
The variable winning means may perform the first opening / closing operation and the second opening / closing operation (for example, JUB opening / closing operation (15R opening / closing operation after the first opening / closing operation)) during the second winning. Is possible,
The variable winning means is capable of performing a third opening / closing operation (for example, a 15R big hit opening / closing operation) without performing the first opening / closing operation during the third winning. And

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the second hit, which performs the same operation partway through the first hit, is a big hit that satisfies a predetermined change condition, the player's interest is improved by performing various effects. There are cases where it is possible. In some cases, it is possible to congratulate the player on the big win that is advantageous to the player, and to improve the game motivation.

(15) In the pachinko machine 100,
The production control means can change at least the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates according to the number of occurrences of the second hit,
The production control means is characterized in that the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates is not changed according to the number of occurrences of the first hit.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the small hits are not counted, it may be possible to enhance other big hits by including in the game a small hit that is more disadvantageous in terms of performance than other big wins.

(16) In the pachinko machine 100,
The production control means does not execute the selection of the production during the period in which the variable winning means during the second winning is performing the first opening / closing operation,
The effect control means is capable of at least executing the selection of the effect during the period in which the variable winning means during the second winning is performing the second opening / closing operation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the effect can be changed at the time when the effect display means finds that it is the third big hit. Since the production is not changed until it is recognized as the third big hit, there is a case where it is possible to provide time for the player to have an expectation and improve the interest of the game.

(17) In the pachinko machine 100,
During the second big hit, the interval at which the opening / closing state of the variable winning means changes includes at least the interval during which the game medium cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum),
The interval at which the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the small hit is an interval at which the game medium cannot enter (for example, the open state is 1.5 seconds at the maximum).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 described above, the first opening / closing operation opens and closes at intervals where the game ball does not enter (commonly referred to as “Pakapaka”). Therefore, it is more likely to be a big hit that is disadvantageous to the player due to the opening operation of the attacker. In some cases, when the player knows that it is the third jackpot, the blessing due to the performance can be further enhanced and the game motivation can be improved.

(18) In the pachinko machine 100,
A symbol display means (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display;
Design control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of controlling at least the design display means,
Of the symbol display means, the first symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212) enters the special symbol 1 starting port 230 when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212). Case), the symbol variation display can be executed.
Of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214) enters the special symbol 2 start port 232 when the second symbol variation condition is established (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214). Case), the symbol variation display can be executed,
The symbol control means can suspend the start of symbol variation display by the first symbol display means when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display (for example, four). And
The symbol control means can suspend the start of symbol variation display by the second symbol display means when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display (for example, four). And
The symbol control means displays the symbol fluctuation display by the first symbol display means when the symbol fluctuation display is suspended for both of the symbol display means when the symbol fluctuation display is newly started. It is configured to preferentially start the symbol variation display by the second symbol display means (for example, special figure 2 priority variation machine),
The first success / failure determination result when the symbol variation display is performed can be selected with a first probability when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied,
The first success / failure determination result when the symbol variation display is performed can be selected with a second probability lower than the first probability when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. And

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the special hit probability of the special figure 2 is lower than that of the special figure 1 due to the priority fluctuation of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 is reduced by reducing the disadvantageous bonus in the special figure 2 in terms of production. In some cases, it is possible to make the game more interesting and improve the interest of the game.

(19) In the pachinko machine 100,
When the result of the success / failure determination is the first success / failure determination result (for example, a small hit), the combination of the first decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the effect display means,
When the result of the success / failure determination is the second determination result (for example, JUB), the combination of the second decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the effect display means,
The combination of the first decorative symbol and the combination of the second decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed on the effect means are a combination of the same decorative symbols.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, since the decorative pattern of the first hit and the second hit is the same, the player does not know which hit, so the player can keep expectation during the hit. There is a case.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the first big hit may be counted. At the time of the first big hit, a predetermined change condition is satisfied, and if the count is made to be counted, the number of songs that can be selected by the first big hit increases, so that the interest of the game can be further improved. In some cases, the first jackpot can be made more advantageous in terms of performance, and the willingness to play can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the second jackpot may be counted or an effect can be selected. The second jackpot that satisfies the condition among the second jackpots can be selected for production, but is not counted. Of the second jackpot, the second jackpot that does not satisfy the condition is counted, but the effect cannot be selected. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored on the production side because it is different on the production side even in the second big hit.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the selection of effects may be performed by the player's operation. For example, the chance button 136 may be used to select an effect by a player's operation. In some cases, the willingness to play can be improved by increasing the effects that can be selected by the player's will.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100, music and images may be selectable in one set. You may make it change the image (moving image) displayed during a big hit by the selected music. By doing so, since the image (moving image) differs depending on the selected song, it may be possible to prevent the presentation from being bored when the big hit continues.
(20) A game machine according to the present invention is:
When the determination condition is satisfied (for example, when the start information is acquired), the determination unit that can execute the determination is performed (for example, a special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) by the main control unit 300) Special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231)),
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120) capable of performing the production operation;
Production control means capable of controlling the production means (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),
Game control means (for example, special figure 2 state update processing (step S225) by the main control unit 300) or special figure capable of performing start control of a first gaming state (for example, winning game state) advantageous to the player 1 state update process (step S227)),
Variable winning means (for example, a variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 3) capable of changing the open / closed state from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state;
A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) comprising:
The first gaming state is a state in which the opening / closing state of the variable winning means changes.
The game control means can perform start control for a small hit in the first gaming state when the result of the determination is a first determination result (for example, a small hit). Control means,
When the result of the success / failure determination is a second success / failure determination result (for example, 2R big hit), the game control means determines the first big hit (for example, 2R big hit) in the first gaming state. It is a control means capable of performing start control,
The game control means, when the result of the success / failure determination is a third success / failure determination result (for example, 15R big hit, substantially 4R big hit or 4R big hit), the second big hit of the first gaming state. It is a control means capable of performing start control (for example, 15R big hit, substantially 4R big hit or 4R big hit)
The second jackpot is a more advantageous hit than the jackpot (see, for example, paragraph “0066”),
The maximum number of times that the open / close state of the variable winning means changes in the first big win is the same number of times (for example, two times) as the maximum number of times that the open / close state of the variable winning means changes in the small hit ( For example, see FIG.
The maximum number of times the open / close state of the variable winning means changes in the second big win is greater than the maximum number of times the open / close state of the variable winning means changes in the small hit (for example, 15 times). Yes (see, for example, FIG. 27, FIG. 29, FIG. 31, etc.)
The game control means is a control means capable of starting a second game state (for example, a special figure high probability state in a game state other than the winning game)
The production control means, when the production operation change condition is established (for example, when the start control of 15R big hit is performed), among the production operation candidates (for example, the production list selectable by the player) Is a control means capable of controlling the effect means to perform the effect operation selected by the player (see, for example, FIG. 28).
The second gaming state is a state configured not to be started after the end of the small hit (see, for example, paragraphs “0067”, “0068”, FIG. 7, etc.)
When one of the small hit and the first big hit is started, the effect operation change condition is not satisfied (for example, see FIG. 19),
When the second jackpot is started, the effect operation change condition is configured to be satisfied (see, for example, FIGS. 19 to 22),
The number of performance actions included in the performance action candidates is configured to increase with the occurrence of the first jackpot that becomes the second gaming state after the first jackpot is over (for example, FIG. 19). reference),
The number of rendering operations included in the rendering operation candidates does not change due to the occurrence of the small hit (for example, see FIG. 19, FIG. 23, etc.)
A game stand characterized by that.
(21)
(20) A gaming machine according to (20),
The second gaming state is a short-time state and a probabilistic state (for example, see FIGS. 5 and 7).
A game stand characterized by that.
(22)
(20) or (21) according to the game machine,
A symbol display means (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214) capable of confirming and displaying the symbol after the symbol variation display;
In the small hit, a symbol form (for example, the special symbol J shown in FIG. 5A) corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination being the first success / failure determination result is fixedly displayed on the symbol display means. (See, for example, the special figure 2 state update process (step S225) and the special figure 1 state update process (step S227) by the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 9).
The first jackpot is a symbol pattern (for example, the special figure H shown in FIG. 5A, the special figure I, FIG. It is configured to start after the special figure g) shown in b) is fixedly displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the special figure 2 state update process (step S225) by the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 9). ) And special figure 1 status update processing (step S227)),
The second jackpot is a symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination being the third success / failure determination result (for example, any one of the special drawings A to G shown in FIG. 5A). Alternatively, any one of the special drawings a to f shown in FIG. 5B is configured to be started after being fixedly displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main control unit shown in FIG. 9). 300 (see special figure 2 state update process (step S225) and special figure 1 state update process (step S227)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(23)
(20) It is a game stand given in any 1 paragraph of (22),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A1)
Production means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208 or speaker 120);
An attacker (for example, the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 3);
A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) comprising:
The attacker is configured to be changeable from one state to the other state in a first state (for example, a closed state) and a second state (for example, an open state),
The second state is a state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the attacker than the first state,
It is configured such that during the period of the first big hit (for example, 15R big hit), the production means performs at least the production operation selected from the production operation candidates (eg, the production list selectable by the player). (See, for example, FIG. 22)
During the period of the second big hit (for example, 2R big hit or 4R big hit), the production means is configured to perform at least production operations that are not included in the production operation candidates (see, for example, FIG. 22). ),
The first jackpot is a jackpot whose maximum number of times that the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is a first number (for example, 15 times),
The second jackpot is a jackpot in which the maximum number of times that the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is a second number (for example, two times or four times),
The first number of times and the second number of times are different numbers (see, for example, FIG. 23),
The winning action candidate is configured to increase when the second jackpot is won (see, for example, FIG. 23).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A2)
A gaming table according to A1,
The first jackpot is a jackpot composed at least from the first number of rounds;
The second jackpot is a jackpot composed at least from the second number of rounds,
The first jackpot is a jackpot that may cause the attacker to enter the second state up to the first time in all rounds of the first number of times (for example, 1R to 15R). ,
The second jackpot is in the second state up to the first time up to the first time in the second number of rounds (for example, 1R to 2R, or 1R to 4R). Can be a big hit,
The second number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A3)
A gaming table according to A1 or A2,
After the small hit is started, the production unit is configured to perform at least a production operation not included in the production operation candidate,
The small hit is a hit in which the maximum number of times that the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is a third number (for example, two times),
The small hit is a hit where the second state is maintained for a maximum of a second time when the attacker changes from the second state to the first state once.
The second time is a time during which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the attacker in the second state,
The first number of times (for example, 15 times) and the third number of times (for example, 2 times) are different times,
The second number of times (for example, 4 times) and the third number of times (for example, 2 times) are different times.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A4)
A gaming table according to A1 or A2,
After the small hit is started, the production unit is configured to perform at least a production operation not included in the production operation candidate,
The small hit is a hit in which the maximum number of times that the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is a third number (for example, two times),
The small hit is a hit where the second state is maintained for a maximum of a second time when the attacker changes from the second state to the first state once.
The second time is a time during which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the attacker in the second state,
The second number of times (for example, 2 times) and the third number of times (for example, 2 times) are the same number of times.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A5)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A4,
Even if the first jackpot is won, the performance operation candidates are configured to increase (see, for example, FIG. 39).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A6)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A5,
The effect means is an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A7)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A6,
In the first round of the first jackpot (for example, 5R), an effect for selecting one effect operation from the effect operation candidates (for example, an effect for changing the effect during the big hit) (hereinafter, “selected effect”) For example) (see FIG. 34 (g)),
The production operation selected in the selection production is configured to start from the second round (for example, 6R) (for example, see FIG. 34 (h)).
The second round is the next round of the first round;
A game stand characterized by that.
(A8)
A gaming table according to A2,
When the first number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in all the rounds constituting the first jackpot, the attacker has the first time after entering the second state. It is configured to be in the first state even before it has passed,
In all rounds constituting the second jackpot, when the first number of game balls wins, the attacker must enter the second state before the first time elapses. Even if it is configured to be in the first state,
A game stand characterized by that.
(B1)
A game machine equipped with a production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120),
The effect means is a means capable of performing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of effect among the plurality of types of effects is one effect selected from the effect candidates (for example, an effect list that can be selected by the player) (hereinafter referred to as “first effect (for example, title) ("Big hit production related to the universe of Kiseki") ") (see, for example, FIG. 27, FIG. 28 (e), (f))
During the period of the first special game (for example, 15R jackpot game), the first production is configured to be performed,
One type of the plurality of types of effects is an effect performed when the first special game ends (hereinafter, referred to as “first end effect (for example, a big hit end effect)”). Yes (for example, see FIG. 27, FIG. 28 (g)),
The first end effect is configured to be performed before the first special game ends (see, for example, FIGS. 27, 28 (e), and (f)).
When the first end effect is performed, the first effect is not performed (for example, see FIG. 28 (g)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2)
A gaming machine according to (B1),
One type of the plurality of types of effects is an effect that is not included in the effect candidates (hereinafter referred to as “second effects (for example, effects 2 and B shown in FIG. 24, effects α shown in FIG. 35, (refer to FIG. 24, FIG. 25 (h), FIG. 26 (h), FIG. 35, FIG. 36 (c) to (g)).
During the period of the second special game (for example, 2R jackpot game, 4R jackpot game, or substantially 4R jackpot game), the second presentation is performed (for example, FIG. 24, FIG. 25 ( h), FIG. 26 (h), FIG. 35, and FIGS. 36 (c) to (g)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B3)
(B2) is a game machine,
When the second special game is won, the production candidate is configured to increase (see, for example, FIG. 23).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B4)
The game stand according to (B2) or (B3),
One type of the plurality of types of effects is an effect performed when the second special game ends (hereinafter referred to as “second end effect (for example, effects 3, C, Or the big hit end effect shown in FIG. 35) ”) (see, for example, FIG. 24, FIG. 25 (i), FIG. 26 (i), FIG. 35, FIG. 36 (h)).
Before the second special game ends, the second end effect is configured to be performed (for example, FIG. 24, FIG. 25 (i), FIG. 26 (i), FIG. 35, FIG. 36). (See (h))
A game stand characterized by that.
(B5)
(B2) to (B4) according to any one of the game tables,
With an attacker,
The attacker is configured to be changeable from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state,
The second state is a state that makes it easier to enter the attacker than the first state,
The first special game is a first jackpot (for example, 15R jackpot),
During the first jackpot period, the number of times the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is configured to be multiple times.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B6)
(B5) is a game machine,
When the first jackpot is won, the production candidates are configured to increase (see, for example, FIG. 39).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B7)
(B5) or (B6), the game machine,
When the last round (for example, 15R) in the first jackpot ends, the first end effect is configured to be performed (for example, see FIG. 28 (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B8)
(B5) to (B7) according to any one of the games table,
Even if the small win is won, the production candidate is configured not to change (for example, see FIG. 23).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B9)
(B8) is a game machine,
One type of the plurality of types of effects is an effect not included in the effect candidates (hereinafter referred to as “third effect (for example, effect 2 shown in FIG. 24)”) (for example, 24, FIG. 25 (c)),
The third effect is configured to be performed during the small hit period (see, for example, FIG. 24 and FIG. 25C).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B10)
(B9) is a game machine,
The second effect (for example, the effect B shown in FIG. 24, the effect α, γ shown in FIG. 35, or the effect for 4R big hit) is different from the third effect (for example, effect 2 shown in FIG. 24). Production (for example, see FIG. 25 (c), FIG. 26 (h), FIG. 36 (c) to (g)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B11)
(B9) is a game machine,
The second effect (for example, the effect 2 executed in the 2R big hit (latency probability variation) state shown in FIG. 24) and the third effect (for example, the effect 2 executed in the small hit state shown in FIG. 24). , Which is the same production (for example, see FIG. 24, FIG. 25 (c), (h))
A game stand characterized by that.
(B12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B11),
Before the first end effect starts, the first effect is configured to end (see, for example, FIGS. 27 and 28 (e) to (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B13)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B12),
One type of effect among the plurality of types of effects is an effect for selecting one effect from the effect candidates (hereinafter referred to as “selected effect (for example, effect for changing effect during big hit)”). Yes (see, for example, FIGS. 27 and 28 (c) to (d)),
During the period of the first special game, the selection effect is configured to be performed (see, for example, FIGS. 27 and 28 (c) to (d)).
After the selection effect is performed, the first effect is configured to be performed (see, for example, FIGS. 27 and 28C to 28E).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B14)
(B1) to (B13) according to any one of the games table,
The effect means is image display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device),
The multiple types of effects are multiple types of effects display (for example, images used for effects),
The effect candidate is an effect candidate display (for example, a display of a selection screen used for an effect for changing an effect during a big hit) (for example, see FIGS. 28C and 28D).
The first effect is a first effect display (for example, an effect display of a jackpot effect related to a song of the title “Kiseki no Universe”) (for example, FIGS. 28E and 28F). reference),
The first end effect is a first end effect display (for example, display of a jackpot end effect) (for example, see FIG. 28G).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B15)
(B1) to (B4) according to any one of the games table,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B16)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B14),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B17)
A game machine equipped with a production means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a speaker 120),
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, a big hit effect related to a song of the title “Kiseki no Universe”) (for example, FIGS. 30D to 30F). ), FIG. 34 (g) to (i), see)
One type of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, the effects α shown in FIGS. 34 (c) and (d) and FIGS. 36 (c) and 36 (d)),
When the first effect is selected by a selection effect that selects one effect candidate from among a plurality of effect candidates (for example, an effect list that a player can select), an effect that starts after the selected effect And
The second effect is an effect not included in the plurality of effect candidates,
The second effect is an effect related to promotion (for example, an effect of whether or not to promote to 15R),
The second effect is an effect having a success pattern (for example, see FIGS. 34 (c) to (f)) and a failure pattern (for example, see FIGS. 36 (c) to (f)),
During the execution of the first jackpot game (for example, a substantial 4R jackpot), the second presentation by the failure pattern is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 36 (c) and (d)),
During the execution of the first jackpot game, the first performance is not performed (for example, see FIG. 36),
When the first effect is performed without performing the second effect during the execution of the second jackpot game (for example, 15R normal jackpot or 15R probability variable jackpot) (hereinafter referred to as “first case” (for example, In the case of the 15R jackpot game effect shown in FIG.
When the first presentation is performed after the second presentation according to the success pattern is performed during the execution of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “second case” (for example, as shown in FIG. 34). If there is a step-up bonus performance))),
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is started after the second jackpot game is started is later than in the first case (for example, FIG. 30 (d), FIG. 34 ( g))
When the first jackpot game is started, a start effect (for example, a jackpot start effect shown in FIG. 36B) is performed,
It said first end effect before the jackpot gaming is terminated (e.g., jackpot end effect shown in FIG. 36 (h)) is carried out, and
In the first case, it is suggested that the second jackpot game before the start of the jackpot game (see, for example, FIGS. 42 (b) to (h)),
In the second case, it is not suggested that the game is the second jackpot game before the start of the jackpot game (see, for example, FIGS. 34 (a) to (j),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B18)
(B17) is a gaming machine according to
The production candidates increase in the first case (for example, see FIG. 39).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B19)
The game table according to (B17) or (B18),
The production candidates increase in the second case (see, for example, FIG. 39)
A game stand characterized by that.
(B20)
(B17) to (B19) according to any one of the games table,
The first jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the production candidates do not increase (for example, see FIG. 39).
A game stand characterized by that .
( B2 1 )
(B 17) to (B20) according to any one of the games table,
The selection effect is a music selection effect (for example, see FIG. 34 (g)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2 2 )
(B21 ) is a gaming table,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
In the selection effect, the player can select one effect candidate from the plurality of effect candidates by operating the operation means (see, for example, FIG. 34 (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2 3 )
The game machine according to any one of (B17) to (B2 2 ),
The effect related to promotion is a round promotion effect (for example, see FIG. 34).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2 4 )
The game stand according to any one of (B17) to (B2 3 ),
The effect related to the promotion is a probability change promotion effect (for example, see FIG. 34).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2 5 )
The game stand according to any one of (B17) to (B2 4 ),
The round in which the first effect in the first case starts (for example, 1R) is different from the round in which the first effect in the second case starts (for example, 5R) (for example, FIG. 30). (D), see FIG. 34 (g)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2 6 )
The game stand according to any one of (B17) to (B2 5 ),
When the first jackpot game (for example, a substantial 4R jackpot) is won, the decorative symbol variation display stop symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) and the second case in the second case are displayed. In some cases, the decorative symbol variation display stop symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) in the case of winning the big hit game is the same (see, for example, FIG. 34 (a), FIG. 36 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2 7 )
The game stand according to any one of (B17) to (B2 6 ),
When the first jackpot game (for example, a substantial 4R jackpot) is won, the decorative symbol variation display stop symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) and the second case in the first case are displayed. The decorative symbol change display stop symbol (for example, “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0”) in the case of winning the big hit game may be different (see, for example, FIG. 30 (a), FIG. 36 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2 8 )
The game stand according to any one of (B17) to (B2 7 ),
The second jackpot game is more advantageous than the first jackpot game (see, for example, FIGS. 25 and 30),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B 29)
The game stand according to any one of (B17) to (B2 8 ),
With the end of the first jackpot game, the symbol variation display can be started,
The start effect is a jackpot start effect (see, for example, FIG. 36 (b)).
The end effect is an ending effect (see, for example, FIG. 36 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B3 0 )
(B17) to (B 29 )
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B3 1 )
(B17) to (B 29 )
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
In the above embodiment, a part of the jump-up bonus (production 1 and production 2) is the same as the effect of the small hit and the latent probability change so that it is difficult to distinguish the jump up bonus from the small hit and the latent probability variation from the effect. . On the other hand, all of the effects of jump-up bonus, small hit, and latent probability change may be made different. Further, all of the effects of jump-up bonus, small hit and latent probability change may be made the same. Also, a part of the small hit and the latent probability change may be the same, or the small hit and the latent probability change may be all different. Further, in the above embodiment, all of the effects of the latent probability change and the sudden accuracy are made different. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the electric support state advantageous to the player is entered. It should be noted that some of the effects of the latent probability change and the sudden accuracy may be different, or all may be the same.

  In the above-described embodiment, the default song is selected unless the effect is changed within a predetermined period in a state where the effect can be changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect may be selected at random. For example, when an effect (song) is not confirmed within a predetermined time (for example, until the end of 2R), an effect may be selected at random from selectable effects. When the pachinko machine 100 is equipped with a direction key and a determination button that can be operated by the player, the player can easily select an effect by operating the button or the like, but there is no operation by the player. Even in such cases, since the production is selected at random, there are cases where the interest can be improved.

  Further, among the options that the player can select, an item “random selection of effects” may be included in the effect list. For example, when the player selects the random selection, one effect is randomly selected from the selectable effects, and when the selectable effect is one (for example, default song), the default song is selected. You may do it. The choice of random selection may be displayed when there is one selectable effect, or may be displayed when there are two or more selectable effects. Moreover, you may make it display, when it becomes more than a regulation number (for example, five productions which can be selected).

Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above may have the following characteristic configuration as a modification.
The pachinko machine 100
If the determination condition is satisfied (for example, when start information is acquired), determination means for determining whether or not the determination is possible (for example, special drawing 2 related lottery processing by the main control unit 300 (step S229)) And special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231)),
Production means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120) capable of at least performing the production operation;
Production control means capable of at least controlling the production means (for example, production control processing (step S409) and sound control processing (step S415) by the first sub-control unit 400),
A game control means (for example, a special figure 2 state update process (step S225) by the main control unit 300) or a special control capable of performing at least start control of a first gaming state (for example, a winning gaming state) advantageous to the player. FIG. 1 state update process (step S227)),
A game machine equipped with
When the result of the success / failure determination is a first success / failure determination result (for example, a small hit), the game control means determines a first hit (for example, a small hit) of the first gaming state. It is possible to perform at least start control,
When the result of the success / failure determination is a second success / failure determination result (for example, 2R big hit), the game control means determines the second hit (for example, 2R big hit) of the first gaming state. It is possible to perform at least start control,
The second hit is a more advantageous hit than the first hit,
When the production operation change condition is satisfied (for example, when start control of 15R big hit is performed), the production control unit performs the production operation selected from the production operation candidates on the production unit. Control is possible,
The production control means can change at least the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates according to the number of occurrences of the second hit,
The production control means is characterized in that the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates is not changed according to the number of occurrences of the first hit.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be applied to, for example, the simultaneous variable machines shown in FIGS. In the special figure 1 and 2 simultaneous variable machine, when both the first symbol variation condition and the second symbol variation condition are satisfied, both symbol variation displays are executed almost simultaneously. When one symbol variation display is being executed and the other symbol variation condition is satisfied, the other symbol variation display may be executable.

  In the above case, when one is hitting the first, the other may be in the second gaming state. Further, in the above case, when one is hitting a small hit, the other may be in a special figure high probability state. Further, in the above case, when one is in a small hit, the other may be in a normal high probability state. Further, in the above case, when one is in a small hit, the other may be in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and the following modifications are possible. For example, the first hit and the second hit may be a first special game state and a second special game state, respectively. The third hit may be the third special game state. Further, the first hit, the second hit, and the third hit may be the first privilege, the second privilege, and the third privilege, respectively. Here, the privilege may indicate a winning state, a gaming state advantageous to the player, or an addition of effects or the like.
Further, the first gaming state may be a gaming state in which a first bonus combination that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state can be won. The second gaming state may be a gaming state in which a second bonus combination that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus combination can be won.
Further, the first hit, the second hit, and the third hit may be a first bonus game, a second bonus game, and a third bonus game, respectively.

  The advantage of the privilege game may be, for example, that the advantage is higher when the number of game media that can be acquired is higher, and the advantage is lower when the number is less, or a game operation that can win the internal winning combination The higher the number of games in the notification game state for notifying the means, the higher the advantage, and the lower the advantage may be the lower the advantage. Alternatively, the game can be performed regardless of the insertion of the game medium. The higher the probability that the re-gamer will win internally, the higher the advantage, and the lower the lower the advantage may be.

  Further, for example, the benefit game may be more advantageous when the number of rounds of the bonus game is higher, and may be lower when the number is less. Further, for example, a privilege game in which a lot of opening that allows a game medium to easily enter the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is performed has a high advantage, and a smaller number may have a lower advantage. Further, for example, the advantage may be high when the gaming state after the end of the privilege game is a special figure high probability state, and the advantage may be low when the special figure low probability state. Further, for example, the advantage may be high when the gaming state after the end of the bonus game is a normal high probability state, and the advantage may be low when the normal gaming state is a low probability state.

Also, for example, the advantage is high when the gaming state after the end of the bonus game is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the advantage is low when it is a case other than the special figure high probability common figure high probability state. It may be a thing. In the above case, if you decide the degree of advantage other than the special figure high probability normal figure high probability, the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state will be advantageous, or the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state will be advantageous. Since it depends on the player's sense of seeing, it cannot be said unconditionally.
Further, for example, the advantage may be high when an effect can be selected during a bonus game, and the advantage may be low when an effect cannot be selected. In addition, for example, a player who has more effects that can be selected during a bonus game may have a higher advantage, and a player who has a lesser effect may have a lower advantage.

  The success / failure determination means in the above embodiment may be a lottery means in a slot machine or the like which will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 49, “a plurality of types of symbols 1002 and a plurality of reels 1002 which are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And a determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 displays a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 50 (a). “Insert bills into bill insertion slot 2002, execute lottery based on bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display lottery result on lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

However, there is a problem that the interest of the player is reduced because a predetermined performance is performed.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game stand that can improve the interest of a player by performing various effects.
According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by performing various effects.
Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.
The game table of the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix 1)
A hit / fail judgment means capable of executing at least a go / no-go judgment when the judgment condition is met;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A symbol control means capable of controlling at least the symbol display means;
Production means capable of performing at least production operations;
Production control means capable of at least controlling the production means;
Variable winning means capable of changing at least the open / closed state from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state;
Game control means capable of performing at least start control of a first game state that is advantageous to a player by changing the open / closed state of the variable winning means;
A game machine equipped with
The first symbol display means of the symbol display means is capable of executing the symbol variation display when the first symbol variation condition is established,
Of the symbol display means, the second symbol display means can execute the symbol variation display when the second symbol variation condition is established,
The symbol control means can suspend the start of symbol variation display by the first symbol display means when the first symbol variation condition is established during the symbol variation display,
The symbol control means can suspend the start of symbol variation display by the second symbol display means when the second symbol variation condition is established during the symbol variation display,
The symbol control means displays the symbol fluctuation display by the first symbol display means when the symbol fluctuation display is suspended for both of the symbol display means when the symbol fluctuation display is newly started. It is configured to preferentially start symbol variation display by the second symbol display means,
The game control means is capable of performing at least a small hitting start control in the first gaming state when the result of the success / failure determination is a first success / failure determination result,
The game control means is capable of performing at least jackpot start control in the first gaming state when the result of the success / failure determination is a second success / failure determination result,
When the production control change condition is established, the production control unit is capable of controlling the production unit to perform the production operation selected from the production operation candidates.
The production control means can change at least the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates according to the number of occurrences of the jackpot,
The game machine characterized in that the effect control means does not change the number of effect operations included in the effect operation candidates according to the number of occurrences of the small hits.
(Appendix 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
The first success / failure determination result when the symbol variation display is performed can be selected with a first probability when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied,
The first success / failure determination result when the symbol variation display is performed can be selected with a second probability lower than the first probability when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. A game table.
(Appendix 3)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1 or 2,
The game control means is capable of performing at least a first jackpot start control in the first gaming state when the result of the success / failure determination is a third success / failure determination result,
The game control means, when the result of the success / failure determination is the second success / failure determination result, the second jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player than the first jackpot of the first gaming state. It is possible to perform at least start control,
The game control means is capable of at least starting a second game state,
The maximum number of times the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the second big win is the same as the maximum number of times that the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the small hit,
When the first jackpot start control is performed at least, the effect operation change condition is satisfied,
The effect control means may change at least the number of effect actions included in the effect action candidates according to the number of occurrences of the second jackpot that becomes the second game state after the end of the first game state. A game stand characterized by being capable.
(Appendix 4)
In the game machine described in Appendix 3,
When the result of the success / failure determination is the first success / failure determination result, the combination of the first decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the effect display means,
When the result of the success / failure determination is the second success / failure determination result, the combination of the second decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the effect display means,
The gaming machine characterized in that the combination of the first decorative symbol and the combination of the second decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed on the effect means are a combination of the same decorative symbols.
(Appendix 5)
In the game stand according to appendix 3 or 4,
The second gaming state is a short time state in which the success / failure determination condition is easily satisfied,
The production control means does not change the number of production operations included in the production operation candidates according to the number of occurrences of the small hits that become the short-time state after the end of the first gaming state. Amusement stand.
(Appendix 6)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 3 to 5,
During the second big hit, the interval at which the open / close state of the variable winning means changes includes at least an interval at which the game medium cannot enter,
The game table characterized in that the interval at which the open / close state of the variable winning means changes during the small hit is an interval at which the game medium cannot enter.
(Appendix 7)
A determination unit for determining whether or not to determine whether or not the determination condition is satisfied;
Production means capable of performing production operations;
Production control means capable of controlling the production means;
Game control means capable of performing start control of a first gaming state advantageous to a player;
Variable winning means capable of changing the open / closed state from one of the open state and the closed state to the other state;
A game machine equipped with
The first gaming state is a state in which the opening / closing state of the variable winning means changes.
The game control means is a control means capable of performing start control for a small hit in the first gaming state when the result of the success / failure determination is a first success / failure determination result,
The game control means is a control means capable of performing a first jackpot start control in the first gaming state when the result of the success / failure determination is a second success / failure determination result. ,
The game control means is a control means capable of performing start control of a second jackpot of the first gaming state when the result of the success / failure determination is a third success / failure determination result. ,
The second big hit is a more advantageous hit than the small hit,
The maximum number of times the open / close state of the variable winning means changes in the first big win is the same as the maximum number of times that the open / close state of the variable winning means changes in the small win,
The maximum number of times the open / close state of the variable winning means changes in the second big win is a number greater than the maximum number of times the open / close state of the variable winning means changes in the small hit,
The game control means is control means capable of starting a second gaming state,
The production control means is a control means capable of controlling the production means to perform the production operation selected by the player from the production operation candidates when the production operation change condition is established,
The second gaming state is a state configured not to be started after the end of the small hit,
When one of the small hits and the first big hit is started, the effect operation change condition is not satisfied,
When the second jackpot is started, the production operation change condition is configured to be satisfied,
The number of performance actions included in the performance action candidates is configured to increase due to the occurrence of the first jackpot that becomes the second gaming state after the end of the first jackpot,
The number of rendering operations included in the rendering operation candidates does not change due to the occurrence of the small hits,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
The second gaming state is a short-time state and a probabilistic state.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to appendix 7 or 8, wherein
A symbol display means capable of confirming and displaying a symbol after the symbol variation display is provided,
The small hit is configured to start after the symbol form corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination being the first success / failure determination result is fixedly displayed on the symbol display means,
The first jackpot is configured to start after the symbol form corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination being the second success / failure determination result is fixedly displayed on the symbol display means. ,
The second jackpot is configured to be started after a symbol form corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination being the third success / failure determination result is fixedly displayed on the symbol display means. ,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 7 to 9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 11)
Directing means;
With attackers,
A game machine equipped with
The attacker is configured to be changeable from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state,
The second state is a state in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the attacker than the first state,
During the first jackpot period, the rendering means is configured to perform at least the rendering operation selected from the rendering operation candidates.
During the second jackpot period, the rendering means is configured to perform at least a rendering operation not included in the rendering operation candidate,
The first jackpot is a jackpot whose maximum number of times that the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is the first number of times,
The second jackpot is a jackpot whose maximum number of times that the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is a second number of times,
The first number of times and the second number of times are different times,
When the second jackpot is won, the production operation candidates are configured to increase.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11,
The first jackpot is a jackpot composed at least from the first number of rounds;
The second jackpot is a jackpot composed at least from the second number of rounds,
The first jackpot is a jackpot that may cause the attacker to enter the second state up to a first time in all rounds of the first number of times,
The second jackpot is a jackpot in which the attacker may enter the second state up to the first time in all rounds of the second number of times,
The second number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11 or 12,
After the small hit is started, the production unit is configured to perform at least a production operation not included in the production operation candidate,
The small hit is a hit in which the maximum number of times that the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is a third number of times,
The small hit is a hit where the second state is maintained for a maximum of a second time when the attacker changes from the second state to the first state once.
The second time is a time during which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the attacker in the second state,
The first number of times and the third number of times are different times,
The second number of times and the third number of times are different times.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to appendix 11 or 12,
After the small hit is started, the production unit is configured to perform at least a production operation not included in the production operation candidate,
The small hit is a hit in which the maximum number of times that the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is a third number of times,
The small hit is a hit where the second state is maintained for a maximum of a second time when the attacker changes from the second state to the first state once.
The second time is a time during which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the attacker in the second state,
The second number and the third number are the same number.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 14,
Even if the first jackpot is won, the production operation candidates are configured to increase.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 11 to 15,
The effect means is an image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 11 to 16,
In the first round of the first jackpot, an effect of selecting one effect operation from the effect operation candidates (hereinafter referred to as “selection effect”) is performed.
The production operation selected in the selection production is configured to start from the second round,
The second round is the next round of the first round;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to appendix 12,
The attacker is the one before the first time has elapsed since entering the second state when the first number of game balls won in all rounds constituting the first jackpot. Is configured to be in the first state,
In all rounds constituting the second jackpot, when the first number of game balls wins, the attacker must enter the second state before the first time elapses. Even if it is configured to be in the first state,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 19)
A game stand with directing means,
The effect means is a means capable of performing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is one production selected from the production candidates (hereinafter referred to as “first production”),
During the period of the first special game, the first production is configured to be performed,
One type of the plurality of types of effects is an effect performed when the first special game ends (hereinafter referred to as “first end effect”),
Before the first special game ends, the first end effect is configured to be performed,
When the first end effect is performed, the first effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 20)
The gaming machine according to appendix 19,
One type of the plurality of types of effects is an effect not included in the effect candidates (hereinafter referred to as “second effect”),
The second production is configured to be performed during the second special game period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
When the second special game is won, the production candidates are configured to be increased.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 22)
A gaming machine according to appendix 20 or 21, wherein
One type of the plurality of types of effects is an effect performed when the second special game ends (hereinafter, referred to as “second end effect”).
The second end effect is configured to be performed before the second special game ends.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 20 to 22,
With an attacker,
The attacker is configured to be changeable from one state of the first state and the second state to the other state,
The second state is a state that makes it easier to enter the attacker than the first state,
The first special game is a first jackpot,
During the first jackpot period, the number of times the attacker changes from the one state to the other state is configured to be multiple times.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 24)
The game stand according to appendix 23,
When the first jackpot is won, the production candidates are configured to be increased.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to appendix 23 or 24,
When the final round in the first jackpot ends, the first end effect is configured to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 26)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 23 to 25,
Even if you win a small hit, the production candidate is configured not to change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to appendix 26,
One type of the plurality of types of effects is an effect not included in the effect candidates (hereinafter referred to as “third effect”),
The third effect is configured to be performed during the small hit period.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 27,
The second effect and the third effect are different effects,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 29)
The gaming machine according to appendix 28,
The second effect and the third effect are the same effect,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 19 to 29,
Before the first end effect starts, the first effect is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 31)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 19 to 30,
One kind of effect among the plurality of kinds of effects is an effect that selects one effect from the effect candidates (hereinafter referred to as “selection effect”).
During the period of the first special game, the selection effect is configured to be performed,
The first effect is configured to be performed after the selection effect is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 19 to 31,
The effect means is an image display means,
The multiple types of effects are multiple types of effects display,
The effect candidate is an effect candidate display,
The first effect is a first effect display,
The first end effect is a first end effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 19 to 22,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 19 to 33,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 35)
A game stand with directing means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a second production,
The first effect is an effect that is started after the selection effect when selected by a selection effect that selects one effect candidate from a plurality of effect candidates,
The second effect is an effect not included in the plurality of effect candidates,
The second effect is an effect related to promotion,
The second production is a production with a success pattern and a failure pattern,
During the execution of the first jackpot game, the second performance by the failure pattern is performed,
The first performance is not performed during the execution of the first jackpot game,
In some cases, the first performance is performed without performing the second performance during the execution of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “first case”).
In some cases, the first presentation is performed after the second presentation according to the success pattern is performed during the execution of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “second case”).
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is started after the second jackpot game is started is slower than in the first case,
When the first jackpot game is started, a start effect is performed,
An end effect is performed before the first jackpot game ends ,
In the first case, it is suggested that it is the second jackpot game before the start of the jackpot game,
In the second case, it is not suggested to be the second jackpot game before the start of the jackpot game,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to attachment 35,
The production candidates increase in the first case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 37)
The gaming machine according to appendix 35 or 36,
The production candidates increase in the second case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
The first jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the production candidates do not increase.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 38 ,
The selection effect is a music selection effect,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 40)
A game machine according to appendix 3 9,
With operating means,
In the selection effect, a player can select one effect candidate from the plurality of effect candidates by operating the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 41)
A game machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 4 0,
The production related to promotion is a round promotion production.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 42)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 41,
The production related to the promotion is a certain change promotion production.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 43)
A game machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 4 2,
The round in which the first presentation in the first case is started is different from the round in which the first presentation in the second case is started.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 44)
A game machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 4 3,
The stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation display when winning the first jackpot game and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation display when winning the second jackpot game in the second case may be the same.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 45)
A game machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 4 4,
The stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of winning the first jackpot game may be different from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of winning the second jackpot game in the first case,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 46)
A game machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 4 5,
The second jackpot game is a jackpot game that is more advantageous than the first jackpot game,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 47)
A game machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 4 6,
With the end of the first jackpot game, the symbol variation display can be started,
The start effect is a jackpot start effect, and the end effect is an ending effect.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 48)
A game machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 4 7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 49)
A game machine according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 4 7,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display device 226 General winning opening 228 Special drawing starting opening 230 Special figure 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member

Claims (15)

A game stand with directing means,
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a second production,
The first effect is an effect that is started after the selection effect when selected by a selection effect that selects one effect candidate from a plurality of effect candidates,
The second effect is an effect not included in the plurality of effect candidates,
The second effect is an effect related to promotion,
The second production is a production with a success pattern and a failure pattern,
During the execution of the first jackpot game, the second performance by the failure pattern is performed,
The first performance is not performed during the execution of the first jackpot game,
In some cases, the first performance is performed without performing the second performance during the execution of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “first case”).
In some cases, the first presentation is performed after the second presentation according to the success pattern is performed during the execution of the second jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as “second case”).
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is started after the second jackpot game is started is slower than in the first case,
When the first jackpot game is started, a start effect is performed,
An end effect is performed before the first jackpot game ends ,
In the first case, it is suggested that it is the second jackpot game before the start of the jackpot game,
In the second case, it is not suggested to be the second jackpot game before the start of the jackpot game,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The production candidates increase in the first case,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The production candidates increase in the second case,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The first jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the production candidates do not increase.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4 ,
The selection effect is a music selection effect,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5 ,
With operating means,
In the selection effect, a player can select one effect candidate from the plurality of effect candidates by operating the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6 ,
The production related to promotion is a round promotion production.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7 ,
The production related to the promotion is a certain change promotion production.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8 ,
The round in which the first presentation in the first case is started is different from the round in which the first presentation in the second case is started.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9 , Comprising:
The stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation display when winning the first jackpot game and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation display when winning the second jackpot game in the second case may be the same.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10 , Comprising:
The stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of winning the first jackpot game may be different from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation display in the case of winning the second jackpot game in the first case,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11 ,
The second jackpot game is a jackpot game that is more advantageous than the first jackpot game,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12 ,
With the end of the first jackpot game, the symbol variation display can be started,
The start effect is a jackpot start effect,
The end effect is an ending effect.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 13 ,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 13 ,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images